目录

前言（第二版） 我想把这本书做得更好

序

前言 语法是十二天可以学成的

第一天 突破英语语法的基本知识和名词

1.1 英语语言概述

1.2 基本词法知识点

第二天 突破英语的代词和冠词

2.1 代词

2.2 冠词

第三天 突破英语的数词、形容词和副词

3.1 数词

3.2 形容词和副词

第四天 突破英语的动词及其两种时态

4.1 动词

4.2 动词的时态

第五天 突破英语的时态（一）

5.1 一般将来时

5.2 过去将来时

5.3 现在进行时

5.4 过去进行时

5.5 将来进行时

第六天 突破英语的时态（二）

6.1 现在完成时

6.2 过去完成时

6.3 将来完成时

6.4 现在完成进行时

第七天 突破英语的被动语态和助动词以及情态动词

7.1 被动语态

7.2 助动词和情态动词

第八天 突破英语的非谓语动词

8.1 不定式

8.2 动名词

8.3 分词

第九天 突破英语的虚拟语气

9.1 虚拟语气

9.2 虚拟语气和条件句

9.3 虚拟语气和从句

9.4 虚拟语气的特殊用法

第十天 突破英语的介词、连词和基本句型

10.1 介词

10.2 连词

10.3 基本句型知识点

第十一天 突破英语的复合句

11.1 主语从句

11.2 宾语从句

11.3 表语从句

11.4 同位语从句

11.5 定语从句

11.6 状语从句

第十二天 突破英语的语序、主谓一致和it的用法

12.1 语序

12.2 主谓一致

12.3 it的用法

参考答案

前言（第二版）

我想把这本书做得更好

2008年的夏天是一个让人难忘的夏天，我在奥组委从事翻译工作，忙得焦头烂额的时候，十二天突破英语系列丛书的第一本——《十二天突破英语语法》经过增删修改几次后终于顺利上市。上市之后，销量很好，收到了很多读者好评，也得到了大量的读者反馈。因为此书是这个系列丛书的第一本，所以我很重视读者的意见。从反馈中可以知道，由于编著时间匆忙而导致了大量的笔误和印刷错误，我心中十分愧疚，但由于各种原因，没有时间勘误，在此要对所有读者说声抱歉。

后来几年陆续出版《十二天突破英汉翻译（笔译篇）》和《英汉翻译教程新说》等学习英语的书籍。根据这本书的经验，我没有匆忙交稿，而是慢工出细活，打造精品。确实，后来这几本书的错误很少，当然这得益于读者的监督。我也在错误中成长，编书时更加细心，尽量让错误，即使是标点、大小写、字体大小等问题都不能出现。

但是，修订这本语法书却成为我的一个心愿。2013年夏天，我在天津新东方上课时，遇到一位江西的高中老师，他说当年就是受到我这本语法书的启发，才把高中的语法知识讲得滚瓜烂熟，我听完之后感到无地自容，因为我知道书中有不少差错没及时校正。2013年秋天，我在美国波士顿做一个项目，终于有了一点时间，和出版社联系后得到了再版此书的允许，十分开心。无论有多忙，修订此书便是我今年最重要的事。夜以继日，加班加点，如今终于完成了。修订过后并没有增加很多新的知识点，因为我一直崇尚语法教学使用结构加知识点的方法，这一点在原来的序言中做了很多的解释。这次修订主要是更正各种错误，甚至是标点错误，希望再版后能让更多的英语语法学习者从中获益。

在此，要感谢吴心月女士在本书修订过程中给予的巨大帮助，感谢她在百忙中抽出时间给我提出了许多宝贵的意见。同时，要感谢北京大学出版社的吴坤娟编辑在修订此书过程中所给予的极大帮助。

当然，修订再版也无法让一本书变得完美无瑕，若修订之后您发现仍有错误或是别的任何问题，请您及时联系我，您的意见将让本书变得更完美。

作者微博：http://www.weibo.com/brotherfive/home

作者电子邮箱：wufeng@bfsu.edu.cn

武峰

2013年10月15日

于美国马萨诸塞州阿灵顿市

序

武峰是我的学生，但过去我并不了解他的个人经历与教学经验。一天他拿着这本《十二天突破英语语法》的书稿找我。听了他的介绍，看了部分书稿，我对他本人有了新的了解，对此书有了一定的评价。

英语语法历来是英语教学中的难点。难，不是因为英语语法复杂，而是因为传统的教法使语法教学变得枯燥、机械，使学生失去兴趣，其结果就是语法关成为一道难关。

当前英语教学面临两种教法，两个市场。其中一个就是培训渠道、应试市场。参加培训的学生目的明确：考试过关。面对这样的市场、这样的要求，教师就要研究如何用最简便的方法使学生抓住要点、顺利过关。武峰的这本书就是针对这种需求编写的。

武峰长期在培训领域教语法，经验比较丰富，又善于积累、总结、研究，故形成了自己的“套路”，经实践检验，比较有效。随着他自己英语水平和教学水平的提高，把做法、想法以书稿的形式表现出来，就成了今天这本书。这种努力应该肯定。虽然这不是学术著作，但只要有利于学习就是好事。相信此书会成为英语培训百花园中的一朵小花。只要努力，小花也会变成艳丽的花朵，吸引人们的目光。

北京外国语大学英语学院

2008年7月11日

前言

语法是十二天可以学成的

今天我能坐在这里写本书的前言，很感慨，也很激动。这本书的出版可谓是历经曲折，增删几次，最后才能在北京大学出版社出版。这也应验了那句好事多磨的古语。我从事英语教学已经多年，最早开始接触的就是语法这个科目，发现这个科目是大家最难突破的，我一直在思考该怎样把这门课教好。最早萌发写本书的时间是在2002年年底，因为那时在安徽合肥建人学校教授成人高考和专升本的课程，在教学的过程中主要涉及的是语法项目，所以常思考该怎么样把这门课程教得更好，慢慢形成了一些心得体会，并把这些都用文字的形式记录下来。2006年，我在西安新东方学校开始了实用英语语法课程的教学，在那时便形成了《十二天突破英语语法》这本书的雏形。在几年的教学过程中，我的教学思路和教学方法得到了大部分学生的认可和赞同，于是开始有了出版这本书的冲动。但是任何一个出版社都知道语法系列的书是很难销售的，所以我一直在不断地碰壁，不断地增删本书的内容，曾经一度放弃了出版此书的念头。直到2008年，我通过在北京外国语大学的几年学习和在新东方教授语法的几年教学，让我对语法的教学又有了新的认识，在教学和学习上有了很大的进步。于是我对本书的内容作了较大的调整，最后形成了今天的《十二天突破英语语法》的蓝本，可谓十年磨一剑。语法书和其他的书籍不一样，词汇书可以参照字典或是别的工具书，但是语法书如果写出来之后还是和大师们写的一样，那就是抄袭了，所以我一直秉承原创的态度。除了这些以外，本书还有以下两个特点。

（一）非学术化

我本身是一个英语的学习者，在北外学习时从来不敢提自己是一个英语教师，因为在课堂上见过太多的英语大师用不同的方式来给我们诠释语言。我写这本书都是自己在教学过程中的一些体会，根本提不上是什么著作，所以我打着所谓“非学术化”的口号，在这里就是想告诉所有英语学习者，所有人都是可以在短期内突破英语语法的。本书不敢和薄冰、张道真、章振邦等大师的书相提并论，他们在几十年的教学过程中形成了自己对于语言的看法和诠释方法，所以出版的图书可谓是经典中的经典，对中国的语法教学起到了重要的作用。本书与之相比可谓相形见绌，但是就是这样的简单的讲解，我相信才能让所有学习语法的人一目了然，而不是从研究的角度来学习语法。

（二）非例举化

现在大多数语法书的特点就是举例，在给出一条语法条目之后就是不停地举例，毫不考虑读者的习惯和思想，以为例子可以告诉所有人该怎么样学习语法。但是他们都忽略了英语语法学习的一个重要点——结构的重要性。我会在后面重点阐述这个问题，例子不在多，而在于精，本书中并没有给出很多的例子，所以显得和传统语法书有所不同。传统语法书一般类似于工具书，给出的例子很多，但是本书基本是一个语法点只有一个例子，甚至一些不重要的语法点都没有例子。我在教学过程中发现，语法教学是要让学生先去理解，再去举例说明。

近年来，在中国兴起了一股学习英语的热潮，但是在这股热潮中大家都把语法的教学忽视了，甚至在很多大学都把语法课程取消了，我想这是很不科学的。如果语言的学习只是通过听和说就能解决的话，那么也就太简单了。当我们再把语法捡起来的时候也就不是那么回事了，操着中国式的英语，那么多雅思、托福、GRE的高分学员出了国还是不会使用语言，难道这就是我们所谓的学习语言吗？我要在这里呼吁一下语法教学，连时态都分不清的语言还敢拿出来说？说给外国人听，别人可以宽容咱们是非英语国家的人；说给中国人听，自己感觉还不错。但这不是学习英语之道。我把语法简化到如此简单的地步，就是为了让所有人可以不把语法学习当作负担，可以通过简单的例子把英语当中所有的现象都清楚地认识和记住，以后就可以好好地使用了。

这两点就是本书的特点了，下面谈谈在学习语法多年后我所认为的最重要的结构性含义。

自从当老师我就一直是在教语法，这么多年间我一直强调语言的结构性特征。其实这不是我编造出来的，这些只是我在学习和教书的过程中根据前人所告诉我们的知识，结合自己的一些心得，所形成的一套结构性的教学法。

在我看来，语言最重要的两个环节是结构性和语义性，其实这两者之间也是相互联系、不可分割的。语言学的大师们把语法学从语言学甚至说是语义学当中分离出来，这是一件很了不起的事情，因为语法有了自己的生命，也可以说语言的结构真正地脱离了语义的范畴。不难发现，在教学的过程中，语言的结构和语义又是无法分开的。比如，在讲述从句中使用虚拟语气的时候，我会说其实语言的结构是固定的，因为任何动词和形容词的词根所导致的虚拟语气都是固定的，但是因为语义的不同而产生了虚拟语气，所以可以看出两者之间的相辅相成性。语言结构的丰富和美丽是让一般人很难理解的。

最近在讲授高级英语语法时，一个学生忽然和我探讨起中学老师所讲述的语法和我所讲述的语法的区别。这个问题我在很多年前就开始思考了，其实也早已经有了答案，因为中学老师所教的是语义意义上的语法，而我完全没有走这条路。在现代转换生成语法中所强调的是结构的重要性，而不是语义的重要性。通俗地说就是中学老师可以讲授词的用法，甚至在精读的课文中讲述语法，但是我所讲的就是纯粹（sheer）的结构。而在大多数人看来，这些结构是枯燥无味和乏力的，甚至觉得缺失一种实用感。因为人们往往比较容易界定和掌握，而对于抽象事物的理解则比较困难。我以前常喜欢用一些大家看上去比较“低俗”的例子去讲述这些知识，让大家比较容易理解，不知道从什么时候开始，我不再去用这些例子，而把自己在大学学习到的那套东西拿出来给学生讲了。

在这里说语法真正要掌握的还是一种结构和层次感。比如说像虚拟语气中if条件句的用法就要是一、二、二、四的结构框架，至于以后还学到什么新的知识和内容只要往里面去填就可以了，没有必要把大师们的语法书都给背熟了。因为大师写书和我们学习确实是两回事，他们用的方法我们称之为“列举法”，就是语言中出现的任何现象都会出现在他写的书中。而我们在教学的过程不可能那么完善和齐备，只要把主要的框架拿出来讲和记忆就可以了，想成为那样的学者和大师是不太可能的。这也许就是宏观结构和微观知识的区别和联系吧。

在叙述完语言的结构性含义之后，我想大家已经知道我为什么要讲这个了，在本书当中，从一开始看就要知道本书的结构框架，我建议大家能把书的目录好好地钻研一下，更重要的是从其中知道语法究竟应该学习什么。刚才花了这么多笔墨说我怎样教语法，那么现在要谈谈我们应该怎么样去学习语法了。

说到英语的语法，我相信大家一定很头疼，而且谁也不会想到和中文语法的联系。这正是学好英语语法的关键所在。首先在这里没有要比较两种语言的意思，我不是语言学的学者，更不是语法学的大师，只是想告诉大家中文的语法也是很重要的。就像我们看两个人一样，我们一般会看两个人之间的差异，不会看相同点。所以，学习语法当然是要看两种语言的差异。正是因为两种语言在结构上有了本质性的区别，所以我们在学习过程中，需要看到的是不同点，比方说中文中把定语从句前置，而英语中却放在后面，这就是为什么我们要学习定语从句的原因，这一切都是源于结构。所以我们要看的是中文和英文两者的语法。

我一直在推荐王力先生的那本《中国语法理论》，在看完这本书之后我的想法很多，因为我们日常生活中有些语言结构是错误的，至于为什么到英语中那样的结构也是错误的，这也就很有道理了。中国在研究中西方文化方面的人实在是太少了，因为学西方的说西方的一套，学中文的说中文的一套，最后谁都说不全。中国语言博大精深，想做好一个英语语法的学习这真不是一件很容易的事情，要在中文的结构上去下工夫。讲了这些之后，希望所有学语法的同学，要意识到脑袋里需要装着知识的体系性和结构性，不能只学几个单词的写法和用法，这些不是学好英语的根本途径。举个例子：在盖楼的时候，不能只看到砖块和金属材料等，最重要的是要看到图纸上的结构和在奠基之后所出来的结构。至于后期如何打磨自己的语言就是另一回事了。

那么英语和中文的区别又在什么地方呢？实际上我认为主要有两个大的方面的差异。

（一）词汇上的差异

中文的词汇一般在词尾没有什么大的变化。在表达任何语法现象的时候都是通过语序的调整和换词来达到目的的。比方说，中文在名词表达复数的时候一般是通过数量词来达到的，一本书是单数，两本书则是复数，但是在英语中却是通过词尾的变化来表明的，a book, two books，只要我们看见名词的后面有s的时候，我们就知道一定是名词的复数。这和中文有极大差异，所以我们在学习语法的时候要知道这样的差异就好学习了。在词法这一章当中主要看的就是词尾的变化，名词有词尾复数的变化，动词有五种形式的变化，形容词有比较级和最高级的变化等，当书中提到这些的时候需要大家注意和认真学习。

（二）句型上的差异

中文多用短句，而英语多用长句。英语中，长难句产生的根本原因很多，涉及语法现象主要有三点：代词的频繁使用、从句的频繁使用和插入语的频繁使用。中国人比较喜欢在句子中重复某类词语，特别是名词，但是英语中喜欢用代词，这样就造成了对于上下文的不理解，而在代词中又以it和that的用法为主，我在讲授的过程中会重点讨论这两个词的用法。从句的使用也是产生英语长难句的一个重要原因，中文中出现从句的时候，大多都用了标点符号，而英语中则用了连词，这样使句子显得很长了。更重要的是，英语当中还有很多插入语，这和我们中文用逗号隔开也是不一样的。

所以当我们察觉到这些差异的时候，也就是我们学好语法的时候了，把代词和从句的知识好好地咀嚼，用少量的例句来帮助大家学习这些知识点，一定会很成功。我经常挂在嘴边的五句话请大家能够记住。

1. 一句话当中不能同时出现两个动词，有两个动词需要有连接，或是一个形式上的改变。

2. 两个句子之间必须要有连词。

3. 疑问词引导的不一定是疑问句。

4. 以-ing结尾的词不一定表示进行。

5. 以-ed结尾的词不一定表示过去。

这五句话在看完我这本语法书后再好好地琢磨，如果都能理解的话，那么你的英语语法也就学习得差不多了啊！

我在这里还想谈谈学习语法的心态和方法问题。

1. 语法和任何一门课不一样，它虽然可以在短期内突破，但是使用起来确实需要很长时间，切勿放弃。

本书的名字叫做《十二天突破英语语法》，很多人怀疑说，真的可以在短期内突破英语语法吗？这是完全可能的，学习和使用是两回事情。学习完了之后用这些知识在各种考试当中的使用才是真正的目的，而不是靠天天把这些语法条目背得滚瓜烂熟，我想这样是没有什么效果的。任何一个理论，只有运用到实践当中才可能有意义。我曾经把初中升高中的语法和GMAT的语法题拿出来给我的学生做，最后的正确率是差不多的。所以我知道，没有什么所谓神秘的东西，只有我们未发现的东西。语法的规则只有那么多，放在一个结构下，我们看不见什么很难掌握的内容，因此，只要我们去实践，就一定能够掌握它。

2. 希望大家把我书上的每个例句都能背下来，这样无论对学习语法来说，还是写作来说，都是有很大好处的。我在前面已经说过，我不主张用什么很难的文学句子或很多例句来凑字数，而是要用最简单的句子来告诉大家这个语法点的现象是怎么出现的，以后在考试中将会以怎样的形式出现。这本书可能是中国市面上最薄的一本语法书，但是我要通过最“薄”的书来告诉大家最“博”的道理和知识。这样简单的知识为什么要用复杂的语言来表达呢？只有通俗易懂的东西才是受大家欢迎的。

3. 希望大家把后面的习题认真地做完。一般来说，我挑选的习题都是历年的高考题、大学英语四六级的语法真题，这些题目都是我在平日的教学中积累下来的，所以都很珍贵。大家如果能把这些题目在学习完语法知识之后再加以练习，那么就一定能达到事半功倍的效果。

我希望在书的前言中讲明本书的意图和学习方法。只要是想学习语法的英语学习者都可以使用本书，从零起点学习英语者到准备考托福、雅思和GMAT的学生，我想这本书的包容性是不言而喻的，因为我在中间所强调的学习语法的理念和方法永远是不会变的。

说了太多的关于这本书和学习语法的事情，在这里也该结束前言部分了。尽管在多年的语法教学过程中我也积累了一些经验，但还是有很多不足的地方。在我教学和生活学习不顺利的时候总是会有那么多人在默默地帮助我。为了这本书，我绞尽脑汁，喜怒哀乐已经不能再用来形容我这么多年出书的心路历程。当我得知这本书将在2008年的夏天由北京大学出版社出版的时候，我仿佛平静了许多，不再有当初的快乐，而是在心中积淀了那么久对于一种新生活的渴望。这本书对我来说是一个起点，我要继续努力地把语法这门课教授得更好，寄希望将来的那些我还未做的事情。人生的幸福不是在于结果，难道这样的过程不正是我们所需要的吗？

在这里首先要感谢我的妈妈这么多年来对我无私的关怀，我无以为报！

在这里更要感谢我的授业恩师北京外国语大学的梅仁毅教授在百忙之中为我的拙作题写序言。

在这里感谢合肥师范学院、北京外国语大学和新东方科技教育集团的老师们以及北京大学出版社的编辑和领导们在出版此书过程中对我极大的帮助和支持。

最后，我还要感谢这么多年以来关心过我，爱护过我，提携过我的所有人，谢谢大家！

一本拙作引来我的千言万语，很多人知道我的经历和遭遇，很羡慕我现在的生活，我经常和身边的朋友分享这样一句话：我是一个平凡的人，如果别人在我的位置上可能会比我做得更好。

书中难免有错误之处，恳请读者批评指正，我将感激不尽，感谢你们对我的支持，谢谢大家！

若有需要请联系我，我的博客地址是：http://blog.sina.com.cn/wfahjl。

武峰

2008年6月28日

于北京外国语大学东院

第一天

突破英语语法的基本知识和名词

Tips：

语法是怎么回事？语法到底包括哪些内容？英语中最简单的名词需要掌握哪些知识？这是我们在第一天的学习中需要掌握的内容。

1.1　英语语言概述

英语是盎格鲁—萨克森人的民族语。它属于印欧语系的日耳曼西部语支，大约形成于公元5世纪。

英语共有26个字母，48个音标。其重要特征是：①屈折变化少，除名词、代词、形容词、副词、动词等有少数变化外，其他无变化；②词汇的开放性，引进外来语较多；③句法较灵活，共有3种句型（简单句、复合句、并列句）。

（1）英语词汇可分为实词和虚词两大类。

（2）英语的构词法主要来源于以下几种方法。

①前缀法（prefixion）：词根前加前缀，词性不变，意义常改变。

②后缀法（suffixation）：词根后加后缀，意义改变，词性常改变。（见表1-1）

表1-1　英语的构词法

前缀

例词

意义

dis-（表否定）

in-（有变体：il- im- ir- 表否定）

un- （表否定）

super- （超……）

re- （再……）

disobey dislike

incomplete irregular impossible

unknown unexpected

superman supermarket

rewrite rebuild

后缀

例词

名词

-ism （表主义）

-er （表人）

-ess （表女性）

-ese -(i)an （表某国人）

-ness （与形容词联用形成名词）

socialism materialism

booker worker

actress waitress

Chinese Russian

meanness happiness

形容词

-ful （多由抽象名词构成）

-less （表否定）

-y （具有某特性）

useful helpful

careless homeless

sunny cloudy

副词

-ly

extremely personally

动词

-ise -ize

-en

modernize nationalize

harden loosen

数词

-th -ty

-teen

fourth fifth thirty

eighteen

③转类法（conversion）：一个单词由一种词性向另一种词性转变，而形式不变。

love（爱）n.
— love（爱）v.

bottle（瓶）n.
— bottle（用瓶装水）v.

④合成法（compound）：一个单词是由两个或两个以上的词构成的新词。形式可分为三种。

A

B

C

sunrise

bee-wax

washing machine

girlfriend

meat-delivery

post office

classroom

self-control

tax cut

（3）句子成分。

一个句子一般由两部分组成，即主语部分和谓语部分。

e.g.: He
（主语）
teaches us English
（谓语部分）
.

句子成分即是在句子中起一定作用的部分，一般可分为以下6种：

①主语（subject）：是一个句子的主体，是全句述说的对象。常用名词或相当于名词的词担当，一般置于句首。

e.g.: The sun
（主语）
is shinning our faces.

太阳正照着我们的脸.

②谓语或谓语部分（predicate or predicate verb）：是说明主语动作或状态的。常用动词担当，置于主语之后。

e.g.: I go
（谓语）
to the park every day.

我每天去公园。

③宾语（object）：是表示及物动词的动作对象或介词所联系的对象的。常有名词或相当于名词的词担当，置于及物动词或介词后。

e.g.: He received a letter
（宾语）
5 days ago.

他5天前收到一封信。

④补语（complement）和表语（predicative）：补语是用于补充和说明主语和宾语的意义，一般说明其特征。常由名词或形容词担当，表语是位于主语后的主语补足语。

e.g.: I saw an old man come across the street
（宾语补语）
.

我看见一个老人过马路了。

I am a good student
（主语补语（表语）
.

我是一个好学生。

⑤定语（attributive）：定语是用来限定或修饰名词或相当于名词的。常由形容词或相当于形容词的短语来担当。

e.g.: She is a very beautiful
（定语）
girl.

她是一个美丽的女孩。

⑥状语（adverbial）：是修饰动词、副词、形容词和全句的一类语法成分。常由副词或相当于副词的短语来担当。

e.g.: Unluckily
（状语）
, she met a white elephant in the park.

很不走运，她在公园里遇见了一头大白象。

Tips：

另外还有一种独立成分（independent element），它不做语法成分，如感叹词、插入语和称呼。

e.g.: Generally speaking
（插入语）
, he is a good man.

大体上说，他是一个好人。

（4）短语（phrase）。

短语是一类具有一定意义的但不构成分句或句子的一组词，它可单独做句子成分，它可分为名词短语﹑动词短语、形容词短语、副词短语、介词短语（注意和短语介词的区别）
、不定式短语、动名词短语、分词短语等。

e.g.:

a university student

（名词短语）

get up

（动词短语）

to see

（不定式短语）

watching TV

（动名词短语）

walking home

（分词短语）

quite warm

（形容词短语）

work hard

（副词短语）

at the gate

（介词短语）

（5）从句（subordinate clause）（见第十一天的内容）。

（6）句子（sentence）。

句子是具有主语部分和谓语部分并有完整意义的可以独立的一组词。英语中有5种基本句型：

①主+谓 — (S+V)

e.g.: Day dawns.

天亮了。

②主+谓+宾 — (S+V+O)

e.g.: He teaches English.

他教英语。

③主+谓+宾+宾补 — (S+V+O+C)

e.g.: John found her very clever.

约翰发现她很聪明。

④主+谓+宾+宾 — (S+V+O+O)

e.g.: He gives me a pen.

他给我一支钢笔。

⑤主+谓+主补 — 主+系+表 — (S+L+P)

e.g.: She is a good nurse.

她是一个好护士。

根据结构可把句子分为以下3种：

①简单句（simple sentence）：一个含有主语（并列主语）和谓语（并列谓语）的句子。

e.g.: Five and five is ten.

五加五等于十。

②并列句（compound sentence）：由一个或一个以上的连词把两个或两个以上的分句合成的句子。

e.g.: I came early, but she wasn't happy.

尽管我回来很早，但她还是不高兴。

③复合句（complex sentence）：由关联词把主句和一个或一个以上的分句合成的句子。

e.g.: He is the man whom I want to talk with.

他是我想说话的那个人。

根据句子的用途可分为：

①陈述句　②疑问句　③祈使句　④感叹句

小结：
在本章中，主要讲述了英语的基本知识，希望大家了解语法结构中的主要成分，主、谓、宾、定、状、补，而且句子的五种形式也是大家在日后经常遇到的，这些都是为以后学习打下坚实基础的主要成分，在不配任何练习题的情况下，希望大家能将书中的每一个例句记牢，便于以后学习。努力吧！

1.2　基本词法知识点

1. 名词的定义、特征和种类

（1）名词是表示人、事物及抽象概念的词。

book 书

railway 铁路

bear 熊

the Great Wall 长城

（2）名词的特征。

①有复数-s词尾的屈折变化。

e.g.: student—students

②有冠词在前说明名词。

e.g.: in the sky　on the desk

Tips：

在这里一定要注意“说明”和“修饰”两个词的不同，说明性的词是不可以省略的，但是修饰性的词是可以省略的。

（3）名词的分类。

Tips：

实际上词汇的分类是一种人为行为，并没有特别的规定，也就是为了在某些场合下可以把可数和不可数名词进行大概的分类。

2. 名词的数

Tips：

数是名词中最重要的语法现象之一。

名词的数可分为可数名词和不可数名词两种。

Tips：

区分两种名词切不可以数量的多少（特别是观念的影响）进行，一定要根据字典。

e.g.: duty（责任）在中文中是不可数，但在英文中为可数——duties。

e.g.: soap（肥皂）在中文中是可数，但在英文中为不可数——a cake of soap。

（1）可数名词的数

表1-2　可数名词的数的变化

（2）不可数名词的数

不可数名词也要表达数量的多少，它们遵循以下的规则。

*当然可数名词也有这种用法：

a box of apples　（注意词尾变化）

two boxes of apples

（3）复合名词的数

①复数变化在最后 afternoon——afternoons

②主要部分发生变化 looker-on——lookers-on

③由man，woman构成的词两部分都发生变化 a man doctor——some men doctors

（4）集体名词的数

Tips：

集体名词的数要遵循“整体是单数（a），个体是复数（b）”的原则。

e.g.: （a）The family is large.

这个家族很大。

（b）The family are large.

这个家里成员很多。

Tips：

有几个和冠词连用的词，谓语只有单数。

the majority

the minority

the public

Tips：

有几个词只有单数，而后跟复数谓语。

people

police

cattle

3. 名词的所有格

Tips：

所有格是和名词的数同样重要的语法现象之一。

（1）所有格的含义和种类

①所有格指的是两词之间所属关系的一种语法现象。

Bruce's wife 布鲁斯的妻子

a cover of the book 书的封面

② 种类（两种形式）：

一是由名词后加's构成（有生命） Xiaoming's desk

一是由名词和 of 构成（无生命） a leg of the desk

（2）'s格的用法

①表示共同拥有的关系时，'s加在最后一个词上。

e.g.: Xiaoming and Wanghai's desk

表示每个人各有的关系时，'s加在每个词之后 。

e.g.: Xiaoming's and Wanghai's desks

Tips：

区别在于前者是两个人共有一张桌（单数），后者是两个人每个人各有一张桌（复数）。

②'s格可表示有生命的东西，有时候也可表示无生命的东西。

A表度量衡：today's newspaper

B表自然现象：the tree's branch

当然也可以用：a branch of the tree

C表国家、城市、星体：a city's park

③如出现家庭、商店、诊所这些词时，都可以省略。

e.g.: the doctor's clinic = the doctor's

Uncle Wang's house = Uncle Wang's

④当可数名词复数形式作定语时's省略为'。

e.g.: the teachers's college = the teachers' college

（3）of 属格的用法（主要用于无生命的东西）

e.g.: a subject of the sentence 句子的主语

（4）双重属格：of +'s的属格形式称为双重属格

e.g.: a picture of Xiao Li's（侧重于整体中的一个，不一定有小李。）

比较：a picture of Xiao Li（侧重于小李的画像，一定有小李。）

Tips：

实际上还有一种比较难的情况：

my father's big red nose和 a big red nose of my father's

前者就是说我爸爸有个大红鼻子，但是后者更有一种感情色彩，请注意这样的短语a lovely baby of my sister's。

4. 名词的性

名词的性可分为：阳、中、阴三种。

eg: boy（阳）

teacher（中）

girl（阴）

Tips：

在英语中已经基本不加以区分阴阳性，这点和其他印欧系的语言有所区别。

小结：
在这一节中主要学习了名词的概述、数、格、性。其中最重要、最常见的是数和格。

请大家回答下列问题：

（1）名词主要包括哪些？

（2）名词单复数是如何区分的？

（3）名词如何变成复数形式？（重点中的重点是九种变法）

（4）名词属格包括哪些？

（5）用's格代替of属格的情况是哪些？

（6）双重属格怎么用？

如果大家把以上的问题能在很短的时间内回答出来，并且记住一些我给出的口诀，那么名词这章就没有问题了。

练习

1. The student is so clever; he has _____.

A. brain

B. a brain

C. brains

D. the brain

2. Could you give me _____ on how to learn math well?

A. many advice

B. many advices

C. a lot of advices

D. a piece of advice

3. — Let's go to cinema.

— I'm sorry. I have _____ tonight.

A. many homeworks

B. much homeworks

C. many homework

D. much homework

4. — Why are you so late?

— I was delayed by _____.

A. any heavy traffic

B. heavy traffic

C. some heavy traffic

D. a heavy traffic

5. Mr. White is _____.

A. a old friend of my father

B. an old friend of my father

C. an old friend of my father's

D. my father old friend

6. Henry went into the _____ to buy a pair of shoes.

A. shoes store

B. shoe store

C. shoe's store

D. shoes' store

7. He is the only one among the _____ teachers who _____ from Beijing.

A. man; comes

B. man's; come

C. men; come

D. men; comes

8. — Please don't be late again next time.

— I didn't intend to but it is _____ from my home to the station.

A. two hours' walk

B. two hour walk

C. two hours walk

D. two hour's walk

9. You have to climb up the _____ tree to fetch the kite.

A. thirty foots high

B. thirty-feet-high

C. thirty-foot-high

D. thirty feet high

10. Mr. Green entered a shop that only sells _____.

A. men shoes

B. man's shoes

C. men's shoes

D. the shoes of men

11. _____ happy life people in the small village live today!

A. What

B. How

C. How a

D. What a

12. Farmers raise _____ on their farm.

A. geese

B. gooses

C. geeses

D. goose

13. This new car is _____.

A. Ricky and Bruce

B. Ricky's and Bruce

C. Ricky and Bruce's

D. Ricky's and Bruce's

14. There are a large number of _____ in the street.

A. passer-by

B. passer-bies

C. passers-bys

D. passers-by

15. My favorite food is some _____ and _____.

A. potatos; bread

B. potatoes; bread

C. potatos; breads

D. potatoes; breads

16. — You are _____, aren't you?

— No, we are _____.

A. Frenchman; Germen

B. Frenchmen; Germans

C. Frenchmen; Germen

D. Frenchmans; German

17. There are lots of _____ eating _____ at the foot of the hill.

A. sheep; grass

B. sheeps; grass

C. sheep; grasses

D. sheeps; grasses

18. That bookstore sells _____.

A. children book

B. children books

C. children's books

D. childs books

19. It's bad _____ to speak with your mouth full of food.

A. manners

B. manner

C. methods

D. way

20. I give my _____ to her on her birthday.

A. the congratulation

B. congratulations

C. a congratulation

D. congratulation

21. She is the one of _____ doctors who _____ from America.

A. woman; comes

B. women; comes

C. women; come

D. woman; come

22. I'm very strange that a work ant has two _____.

A. stomach

B. stomaches

C. stomacs

D. stomachs

23. He is the best _____ teacher.

A. chemistry

B. chemistry's

C. chemical

D. chemical's

24. A thief is a harm to _____.

A. the society

B. society

C. societies

D. a society

25. _____ is waiting for you, John.

A. Mr. Smith

B. A Mr. Smith

C. The Mr. Smith

D. Sir. Smith

26. What do you think about _____ advice?

A. any one's else

B. anyone else's

C. any's one else

D. anyone else

27. He went on doing his homework after _____.

A. a moment rest

B. moments rest

C. a moments' rest

D. a moment's rest

28. Cattle _____ eating in the field at that time.

A. are

B. is

C. was

D. were

29. The village is about _____ ride from here.

A. one and a half hour's

B. one-half-hour

C. one and half hour

D. one and a half hours'

30. Tom's _____ as white as pearl.

A. tooths are

B. teeth is

C. tooth is

D. teeth are

31. There is _____ on my back.

A. pain

B. a pain

C. of pain

D. pains

32. Paper was first invented in _____.

A. east

B. East

C. the East

D. the east

33. Lucy does _____ homework than any other _____ in the class.

A. much; student

B. most; student

C. more; student

D. more; student

34. _____ an important subject in university.

A. Politics are

B. The politic are

C. Political is

D. Politics is

35. He has two _____ bills in my pocket.

A. ten-dollars

B. ten-dollar

C. ten dollar

D. ten dollars

36. He has spent _____ money on novels.

A. a great deal of

B. a plenty of

C. many

D. a number of

37. This piece of _____ is enough for him to make a suit.

A. cloth

B. cloths

C. clothing

D. clothes

38. She seems to be _____, but as matter of fact she is very clever.

A. a girl of a fool

B. a fool of a girl

C. a fool of the man

D. a man of my fool

39. How times flies! I find she has _____.

A. a little gray hair

B. a few gray hairs

C. some gray hair

D. much gray hair

40. Is _____ I visited last month?

A. this factory where

B. this school one

C. this the school

D. this school

第二天

突破英语的代词和冠词

Tips：

在第二天的学习中，将接触到代词和冠词这两部分，其中代词是比较容易的，主要应该注意不定代词的用法，而冠词是中文当中所没有的，所以三种冠词的用法在书中讲了多少，希望大家就要牢牢记住多少，不要再多去学习，很多英语学者曾经用大量的笔墨讲解冠词的用法，但实际上一般学习者没有必要学习那么多用法。

2.1　代词

1. 代词的定义及分类

（1）代词是代替名词以及起名词作用的短语、分句或句子的词。

（2）代词可分为人称代词、物主代词、指示代词、反身代词、相互代词、不定代词、疑问代词、连接代词和不定代词等。

2. 人称代词

人称代词是人称范畴，它们有曲折变化形式，有人称、数和性的变化。

表2-1　人称代词

主格用于主语，宾格用于宾语。

Tips：

宾格常用于动词和介词之后。

e.g.: He
（主格）
stood in front of her
（宾格）
.

他站在她的前面。

Tips：

在这里要注意和中文的区别，中文第三人称单数的读音都是一样的，只要不写出来很难区分是男是女，甚至还是动物。

Could you
（主格）
go with us
（宾格）
?

你能和我们一起去吗？

3. 物主代词

物主代词是表示所属关系的代词，类似于名词的属格。它可分成形容词性物主代词和名词性物主代词。

表2-2　物主代词

（1）形容词性物主代词

这一类代词相当于形容词，可以作定语。

e.g.: My
shirt is blue.

我的衬衫是蓝色的。

His
bike is broken.

他的自行车坏了。

Your
teacher has just come into the classroom.

你们老师刚刚进教室。

（2）名词性物主代词

这一类代词相当于名词，可以做主语、表语和宾语。

e.g.: There are three apples. I have two. Mine
are red.

我有三个苹果中的两个。我的（苹果）是红的。

Her blouse is green. We don't like hers
.

她的毛衣是绿色的。我们不喜欢她的（毛衣）。

There is a gray pencil and a black pencil on the desk. The gray one is yours
.

桌上有一支灰色和黑色的铅笔。灰色的是你的（铅笔）。

4. 指示代词

指示代词一般包括this（这个，近指单数）、that（那个，远指单数）、these（这些，近指复数）、those（那些，远指复数），此类代词较简单。

e.g.: This
is a desk.

这是一张桌子。

These
are trees.

这是一些树。

That
pen is black.

那支笔是黑色的。

Those
apples are red.

那些苹果是红色的。

5. 不定代词

Tips：

英语中最重要的代词，本章节采用比较的方法来讲解，请大家注意要比较清楚。

不定代词是用来代替不确定一类事物的代词。此类词的用法较难，它一般包括some, any, no, none, many, much, few, little, each, both, all, either, neither, one, another, the other等。

（1）some和any

some和 any都表示“一些”时，some用肯定句，any用于否定句和疑问句。

e.g.: There are some
people at the gate of the theater.

有一些人在剧院门口。

I haven't any
pencils.

我没有铅笔。

some也可用于疑问句，表示一种客气的请求。

e.g.: Would you like some
cups of tea?

你要喝茶吗？

any也可用于肯定句，它表示“任何”的意思。

e.g.: Anyone
can do it.

任何人都能做。

（2）each和every

each和every都表示“每一个”，each可少于三个，可以是两个，而且注意力在个体上，every至少是三个或是三个以上，它主要集中在整体上。

e.g.: Each
teacher will give a speech in the meeting.

每个老师都将要在会上做报告。

Every
student can pass the exam.

每个学生都能通过考试。

（3）many和much

many和much都表示“许多”的意思，只是 many 修饰或代替可数名词，much修饰或代替不可数名词。

e.g.: Many
students are playing on the playground.

许多学生都在操场上玩。

Tips：

many a man这种用法也比较特殊，因为虽然表示“许多人”，但是后面的谓语动词用的是单数。一般只有可数名词有这种变化。

He has much
money, so he can buy anything he likes.

他有很多钱，所以他可以买任何他喜欢的东西。

Tips：

一般很少提这两个词的根本性区别，实际上many是一个形容词性的单词，而much则是一个副词词性的单词，从词性上判断词的用法是最好不过的。

（4）a few和a little

a few和a little都表示“一些”的意思，比some要少，它们可修饰或代替名词，但a few是和可数名词连用，而a little则和不可数名词连用。

Tips：

它们的否定形式是将前面的a去掉。

e.g.: A few
bananas are on the desk.

桌子上有一些香蕉。

A little
water is in the glass.

杯子里有一点水。

Few
bananas are on the desk.

没有多少香蕉在桌上。

Little
water is in the glass.

杯子里没有多少水。

Tips：

一般很少提这两个词的根本性区别，实际上a few是一个形容词性的单词，而a little则是一个副词词性的单词，从词性上判断词的用法是最好不过的。

（5）no, none, no one和nothing

no相当于形容词，它相当于not a (any)，可修饰不可数、可数名词。

e.g.: We have no
lessons in the afternoon.

= We have not any
lessons in the afternoon.

下午我们没有课。

I have no book. = I have not a
book.

我没有书。

none可指人或物（指三个或三个以上）。

e.g.: None
of us know(s) French.

我们中没有人懂法语。

*none后面的动词谓语可以用单数，也可以用复数。

no one可以指人，不可指物。

e.g.: No one
can do this job.

没有人能做这项工作。

nothing一般只能指物而不能指人。

e.g.: Nothing can be done easily.

没有事情可以轻易地做成。

而且这三个词一般来说，只有none后面可以加of，其余两个一般不用。

（6）both和all

强调两个人或物时（不是一个），才用both。

e.g.: I have two brothers. Both
are students.

我有两个兄弟，他们都是学生。

both…and… 是常用词组。

e.g.: Both
you and
she are teachers.

你和她都是教师。

all强调“所有”、“一切”的意思，强调三个或三个以上。

e.g.: All
the people are men.

所有的人都是男的。

*Not all the people are men.

并非所人都是男人。（部分否定）

*All the people are not men.

所有人都不是男人。（全部否定）

Tips：

not在不同的位置会产生不同的效应，在书后面的一些章节也会提到。有部分否定和完全否定，还有否定的前置问题。

（7）other, another, the other和the others

other是一个形容词，而不是副词。other people 另一些人

the other 指的是“另一个”，一般是指两者之间的另一个。

e.g.: I have two books. One
is on history, the other
is on politics.

我有两本书，一本是关于历史的，一本是关于政治的。

the others指的是“另一些”，一般是指两部分之间的另一些。

e.g.: There are many people in the park. Some
are running, the others
are playing football.

公园里有很多人，一些人在赛跑，另一些在踢足球。

another指的是“另一个”，一般是指三者或三者以上的另一个。

e.g.: I have three magazines. One
is white and black, another
is red, still another is blue.

我有三本杂志，其中一本是黑白色的，另一本红色的，还有一本是蓝色的。

Tips：

第三个使用still another。

（8）either和 neither

either指的是“两个中其中一个”。

neither指的是“两个都不”。

e.g.: Either of
them can draw a picture.

他们中有一个会画画。

Neither of
them can draw a picture.

他们中没有会画画的。

Tips：

两个重要的词组：either ... or和neither ... nor。

e.g.: Either
he or
I am a student.

他和我有一个是学生。

Neither
he nor
I am a student.

他和我都不是学生。

（9）复合不定代词

这是由some, any, no, every和thing, body, one 构成的。共有12个（something, someone, somebody, anything, anyone, anybody, nothing, nobody, no one, everything, everyone, everybody），这些词需用单数的谓语动词。

e.g.: Someone
is in the classroom.

有人在教室里。

Tips：

一般来说，someone和somebody，anybody和anyone, everyone和everybody在现代英语中一般没有区别，但是现在使用someone更多。

如果有形容词修饰它们时，形容词一般放在它们后面。

e.g.: I have something
important to tell you.

我有重要的事告诉你。

You need to do everything
necessary.

你需要做任何有必要做的事情。

6. 疑问代词

Tips：

注意和疑问副词的区别。

疑问代词有what, who, whom, where和which。

（1）what的用法：用来问某问题的性质，可做主语、宾语和表语。

e.g.: What
's your father? = What
does your father do?

你父亲是干什么的？

（2）who的用法：“谁”的意思，做主语和表语，问人称。

e.g.: Who
are they?

他们是谁？

Who
is that boy standing under the tree?

那个站在树下的小男孩是谁？

（3）whom的用法：“谁”的意思，作宾语。

e.g.: Whom
were you talking with?

刚才正在和你说话的是谁？

（4）which的用法：“哪一个”的意思，作宾语和表语，一般和or连用。

e.g.: Which
fruit do you like better, oranges or apples?

你更喜欢哪一种水果，桔子还是苹果？

（5）whose的用法：“谁的”意思，作定语。

e.g.: Whose
shirt is white?

谁的衬衫是白色的？

7. 关系代词

关系代词详见第十一天的内容。

小结：
在本章中的学习中，应该注意代词的基本用法，人称代词和物主代词需要大家记忆，还要分清指示代词的近指和远指，疑问代词中的which和what的根本性区别，最重要的就是不定代词。

请回答下列问题：

（1）a few和 a little的本质性区别是什么？

（2）many和 many a的区别是什么？

（3）some 是否全部用于肯定句？any是否完全用于疑问句和否定句？

（4）no 是什么词性？ none，nothing和no one的区别是什么？

（5）either和neither的区别？

（6）other的词性？another，the other和others的区别是什么？

（7）复合不定代词有哪两个特征？

代词的关键是不定代词，不定代词的关键是这7组词汇，回答出以上这些问题就可以了。

2.2　冠词

1. 冠词的含义

冠词应包括以下三层含义。

（1）冠词是一种虚词。

Tips：

所谓的虚词指的是不能在句子中单独构成成分的几类词，有冠词、连词和介词等。在这里要强调，副词在英语中是实词，做状语，而在中文中却是虚词。

（2）冠词不能单独使用，而且不能构成句子成分。

（3）冠词是用来说明名词的，而不是修饰名词，这一点要注意的。

2. 冠词的分类

冠词可分为定冠词（the），不定冠词（an和a）和零冠词。

3. 不定冠词的用法

不定冠词可分为a和an两种。a一般用于辅音音素前，发作/a
/，而an用于元音音素前，发作/n
/。

e.g.: an hour

an honest boy

a university

a big apple

Tips：

元音音素和元音字母是两回事，所以不是以元音字母开头的单词都要用an。

There is _____ “s” and _____ /s/ in this word “smile”.

用a和an填空，前者填an，后者填a，因为前者是字母，读作/es
/，是元音音素开头的；后者是音素，读作/s
/，所以用a。

（1）不定冠词表示单数“一”或不确定时使用，源于数词one。

e.g.: A
boy is standing under the tree.

一个小男孩正站在树下。

“a”在这里既指一个小男孩，又是表示不确定男孩是谁。

（2）用于单形名词前表示一类东西。

e.g.: A
horse is smaller than an
elephant.

马比象小。（并不是一匹马比一头大象小。）

Tips：

可数名词的类指实际上有三种方式。

A
horse is smaller than an
elephant.

The
horse is smaller than the
elephant.

Horses are smaller than elephants.

这三句都是“马比象小”，在用法上可以在可数名词单数前加定冠词和不定冠词以及把它们变成复数形式。

（3）固定词组

as a matter of fact 事实上

a few 一些（修饰可数名词复数）

as a result 结果

a little 一些（修饰不可数名词）

a bit 一点

a little bit more 一点点

a lot of a great deal of

a great number of 许多

4. 定冠词的用法

定冠词the用于辅音音素前，发作/　/，而the用于元音音素前，发作/i
/。

e.g.: the boy

the apple

（1）定冠词源于that，用于专指和特指。

e.g.: The
boy is my son.

这个男孩是我儿子。

Take the
apple.

拿这个苹果。

（2）用于单形名词前。

e.g.: The
horse is smaller than the
elephant.

马比大象小。（并不是这匹马比这头大象小。）

（3）形容词比较级前和序数词前。

e.g.: The
most important is that we need deal with this problem first.

最重要的是首先我们要处理这个问题。

The
boy is the
same as his father.

这个男孩和他爸爸长得一样。（*same前须用the）

It is the
first time that I have heard of it.

这是我第一次听说这件事。

Tips：

不定冠词用于形容词最高级前和序数词前的比较。

（4）用于形容词和过去分词前，表示一类人，且谓语用复数。

e.g.: The
poor often hate the
rich.

穷人总是很讨厌富人。

The
injured were sent to the hospital at once.

受伤的人必须马上被送往医院。

（5）用于乐器之前。

e.g.: play the piano

play the violin

Tips：

现在如果是中国乐器，且用拼音表示的话，那么一般来说不用冠词，例如：play Yangqin和play Hulusi等。

（6）用于世界上独一无二的东西，通常须记住以下几个。

e.g.: the star

the sun

the earth

the moon

Tips：

实际上世界上所有的东西都是独一无二的，只是在这里让大家记住这样几个最常用的词，不是绝对的用法。

（7）用于专有名词前。

①用于复形/复数名词前表示一类人。

the Chinese people 中国人

the Germans 德国人

the Browns 布朗一家人

the Grays 格里一家人

②用于某些江河湖海等地理名词前。

the Great Wall 长城

the Changjiang River 长江

the Pacific Ocean 太平洋（大洋前用the）

the Alps 阿尔卑斯山

the United States 美国

the Bible 《圣经》

（8）固定词组

in the morning/afternoon/evening 在早晨/下午/晚上

to tell you the truth 老实说

in the middle of 在中间

in the east/west/north/south 在东边/西边/北边/南边（方向前用定冠词）

go to the theater 去看电影（某些娱乐活动用定冠词）

the Spring Festival 春节（中国传统节日前要定冠词）

5. 零冠词的用法

零冠词在英语中运用得相当广泛，零冠词不代表没有冠词，而是省略用法。

（1）用于泛指人类或男女时。

e.g.: Man is mortal.

人总有一死。

（2）用于“kind (sort) of”后。

e.g.: What kind of deer it is?

这是哪种鹿？

（3）用于职务、职位和头衔前。

e.g.: He was elected our president.

他被选举为我们的主席。

（4）用于复形名词前，表一类。

e.g.: Horses are smaller than elephants.

马比象小。（并不是一匹马比一头象小。）

（5）用于月份、星期、节假日（国际性节日）和四季。

e.g.: January

New Year

Christmas Day

National Day

in winter/summer/spring/autumn

（6）用于一日三餐，球类运动前。

e.g.: have supper　play football　play basketball

但有限定词修饰时要用冠词。

e.g.: have a delicious meal

（7）用于“by+交通工具”前。

e.g.: by car

by plane

Tips：

注意by water和by air等词的用法，不是表示通过水和通过空气，而是表示通过水路和坐飞机。

（8）名词前有代词修饰时不用冠词。

e.g.: Some apples are red.

一些苹果是红的。

They are doing their homework.

他们正在做家庭作业。

（9）固定词组

catch fire 起火

lost heart 丧失信心

take place 发生

by chance 偶然

by day 整天

from time to time 有时

on foot 步行

one by one 一个接一个

heart and soul 全心全意

in time 及时

on time 按时

in front of 在前面

in spite of 尽管

take part in 参加

make use of 利用

6. 某些词的冠词使用情况

（1）“radio”作“电台”时，不加冠词 radio station

作“无线电广播”时，加冠词 listen to the radio.

（2）“society”作“社会”时，不加冠词 in our society

作“社会主义国家”时，加冠词 the societies

（3）“nature”作“自然”时，不加冠词 keep the balance of nature

小结：
冠词是一个比较难理解的语法点，因为它在中文里是不存在的。所以在学习时切记不要和中文中的某些词比较使用，一定要记牢冠词的使用方法，不定冠词不是非常重要，记住固定用法即可；然而定冠词和所谓不使用冠词（零冠词）的用法则特别重要。

请回答：

（1）类指的三种方法是什么？

（2）过去分词和形容词最高级前面用什么冠词？

（3）江河湖海前用什么冠词？

（4）乐器前用什么冠词？

（5）职称、称谓前用什么冠词？

（6）物质名词和抽象名词前是否用冠词？

（7）一日三餐、球类运动、假日前用什么冠词？

以上7种是我们最常见的冠词用法，定冠词和零冠词要好好地区分开来。

代词练习

1. If people pay attention to protecting environment, _____ money will be saved.

A. a large number of

B. the number of

C. many

D. a great deal of

2. Listening and speaking are both necessary to English; _____ practices our oral English and _____ makes us know what other people say.

A. that; this

B. this; that

C. one; the other

D. one; another

3. Though the African people are very poor, _____ has been to help them.

A. little

B. enough

C. few

D. many

4. _____ made a big mistake.

A. You, Jim and I

B. You, I and Jim

C. I, Jim and you

D. I, you and Jim

5. _____ is exciting. I enjoy it very much.

A. Both lectures

B. Neither lecture

C. Both of lectures

D. Either of the lectures

6. Mr White has three sons, _____ is doctor, _____ are teachers.

A. one; another

B. one; the others two

C. one; other two

D. one; the other two

7. — Could you lend me your ink?

— Sure. But I'm afraid that there is _____ left.

A. little

B. much

C. a little

D. many

8. — Do you want an apple or an orange?

— _____. I don't mind.

A. Both

B. Neither

C. Either

D. All

9. A few of _____ are planning to have a picnic during the summer holiday.

A. us boys

B. we boys

C. boys we

D. boys us

10. I have two pens, one is red; _____ is black.

A. other

B. the other

C. another

D. others

11. — What do you think about this book?

— So difficult that I think not _____ of students understand it.

A. all

B. some

C. few

D. any

12. In America, there is a great deal of food, in fact, sometimes _____.

A. too many

B. much too

C. too more

D. too much

13. _____ of the students in my class do their best to improve their spoken English.

A. Which

B. All

C. Each

D. Every

14. _____ of the classroom is full.

A. Either

B. All

C. Everyone

D. Every one

15. — How many tickets for the film did you buy yesterday?

— _____.

A. None

B. No one

C. Nothing

D. Nobody

16. — Is _____ OK with you to go swimming Saturday?

— Sure. Any time will be OK.

A. there

B. this

C. that

D. it

17. This work is too much for us. We need _____ people.

A. another

B. other two

C. two more

D. more two

18. — Who is in the house?

— _____.

A. None

B. Nothing

C. Nobody

D. Every

19. I want to know _____ the book is.

A. of which

B. whose

C. who

D. whom

20. America is a country _____ is rich in natural resource.

A. who

B. what

C. in which

D. that

21. Sherry got high marks in the examination, _____ had been expected.

A. as

B. what

C. that

D. who

22. He is the only one the best writer _____ praised four times by the government.

A. who have

B. who has

C. that has been

D. who have been

23. China is the one of the countries _____ nuclear weapons.

A. who has

B. which has

C. that have been

D. that has

24. She has _____ interesting novels than I have.

A. much more

B. many

C. much

D. many more

25. — Do you speak English?

— Yes, but only _____.

A. little

B. few

C. a few

D. a little

26. If this dictionary is not yours, _____ can it be?

A. what else

B. who else

C. which else's

D. who else's

27. Shanghai is larger than _____ city in Africa.

A. any

B. another

C. other

D. any other

28. Shanghai is larger than _____ city in china.

A. any

B. another

C. other

D. any other

29. I have decided to do it and anything _____ you say will not change it

A. that

B. whose

C. which

D. about which

30. _____ is known to all, war is serious.

A. That

B. It

C. As

D. Since

31. Could you tell me the reason _____ you were upset?

A. which

B. for that

C. for why

D. why

32. Would you like _____ tea?

A. any

B. much

C. little

D. some

33. Little John visits his grandparents every _____.

A. a few days

B. another day

C. other day

D. few days

34. China is famous for _____ history.

A. his

B. him

C. its

D. it is

35. Everyone has gone, _____?

A. hasn't he

B. don't they

C. haven't they

D. doesn't he

36. All the homework, _____ my teacher gave to me, should be finished tonight.

A. that

B. which

C. what

D. they

37. The population of China is larger than _____ of America.

A. that

B. those

C. the

D. it

38. There is a wide road in front of my house, but _____ of the side has trees.

A. both

B. every

C. neither

D. none

39. These trousers are too small, please give a bigger _____.

A. set

B. one

C. piece

D. pair

40. I have two watches, _____ are made in Japan.

A. both

B. both of them

C. both of which

D. neither

41. — How shall I take this medicine?

— Two pills _____.

A. three times every day

B. three times day

C. three time everyday

D. three times one day

42. I have many friends, but _____ could help me when I was in trouble.

A. all of them

B. each of whom

C. not all of whom

D. none of them

43. Leifeng was so kind that he always helped other people; but he never thought of _____.

A. himself

B. his

C. him

D. his own

44. — What can I do for you?

— I want to have a job, _____ sort of job.

A. one

B. any

C. other

D. the same

45. — Who is knocking the door?

— _____ must be Paul.

A. He

B. She

C. That

D. It

46. — Could you want _____ to eat?

— Oh. Yes, I have not been having _____ all day.

A. something; nothing

B. anything; something

C. anything; nothing

D. something; anything

47. — Do you have _____ to state?

— No.

A. something important

B. important something

C. anything important

D. important anything

48. Everyone took off _____ hats.

A. her

B. his

C. their

D. its

49. — What about these two books?

— I think that _____ of them is interesting.

A. both

B. none

C. neither

D. all

50. I have already eaten two cakes, but I still want _____ cake.

A. other

B. the other

C. another

D. the others

51. There are _____ apples in the basket.

A. a plenty of

B. plenty of

C. lot of

D. much

52. Her skirt is more beautiful than _____.

A. my

B. mine

C. I

D. me

53. — Why don't we take a little break?

— Didn't we just have _____?

A. it

B. that

C. one

D. this

54. I think _____ wrong to take _____ for granted that _____ is very difficult to learn a foreign language.

A. that; something; it

B. it; it; it

C. it; it; that

D. it; nothing; it

55. John said he'd been working in the office for an hour, _____ was true.

A. he

B. this

C. which

D. who

56. _____ the houses were destroyed during World War Two.

A. Both

B. Most of

C. Any

D. All

57. _____ are there _____ true.

A. That they; is

B. They; is

C. That they; are

D. They; are

冠词练习

1. It is known that _____ main material for building houses has been brick, but _____ metal and wood have also been used today.

A. the; /

B. /; /

C. /; the

D. the; the

2. _____ is the only animal that can think.

A. Man

B. A man

C. The man

D. Men

3. Madame Gurie was _____ first person who was given _____ second Nobel price.

A. the; a

B. the; the

C. a; the

D. a; a

4. She is _____ girl we are waiting for.

A. the right

B. a very

C. very

D. a right

5. _____ having a wonderful supper.

A. The Smith is

B. The Smiths are

C. The Smith is

D. The Smith are

6. It was reported that _____ satellite would be sent into _____ space.

A. a; the

B. a; a

C. /; the

D. a;/

7. _____ wants to see you.

A. The Green

B. The Greens

C. A Mr. Green

D. Mr. Green

8. It would be _____ wonderful world if all nations lived in _____ peace with each other.

A. a; /

B. the; /

C. the; the

D. the; a

9. — How _____ is the population of India?

— India has _____ population of more than 1,100,000,000.

A. large; the

B. large; a

C. many; a

D. many; the

10. Rice is usually sold by _____ weight, which eggs are sometimes sold by ___dozen.

A. the; the

B. /; the

C. the; a

D. /; a

11. _____, he knows much about electricity.

A. A child is

B. As a child

C. Child as he is

D. As a child he is

12. Some people still think advertisement is _____ waste of money instead of _____ industry.

A. the; the

B. a; an

C. a; the

D. /; an

13. _____ it is to attend the party!

A. What funny

B. What a fun

C. How a fun

D. What fun

14. As the development of economy, _____ between China and America has increased since 1987.

A. the trade

B. trade

C. a trade

D. trades

15. John has a pen _____ mine.

A. the same as

B. the same like

C. same like

D. the same

16. One day _____ fire broke out in the forest near my house and the fire-fights tried to put out _____ fire.

A. the; a

B. a; a

C. a; the

D. the; the

17. Professor Wang is still in _____ habit of smoking in _____ places.

A. the; the

B. the;/

C. a; the

D. /; the

18. — What is _____ with you?

— I’ve got _____ in my right arm.

A. a matter; pains

B. the matter; the pain

C. the wrong; a pain

D. the matter; a pain

19. Pay attention to _____ main idea when reading _____ English novel.

A. a; the

B. the; an

C. the; the

D. a; an

20. _____ Middle Autumn is _____ traditional festival in China.

A. The; a

B. A; a

C. A; the

D. /; a

21. I prefer _____ milk to _____ tea.

A. a; a

B. /; a

C. a;/

D. /;/

22. Most girls like to play _____ piano while most boys like to play _____ football.

A. the;/

B. the; the

C. a;/

D. /;/

23. — Have you seen _____ hat?

— Is it _____ red one? I saw it in your bedroom.

A. a; the

B. the; a

C. the; the

D. a; a

24. Do you know _____ man who is talking with _____ president?

A. the; the

B. a; the

C. the;/

D. /;/

25. — Tom, are you in _____ washroom?

— No, I'm in _____ bed.

A. the;/

B. the; the

C. a; a

D. a;/

26. _____ bad information I have got yesterday!

A. How

B. What a

C. How a

D. What

27. He looked at me _____ as if I was wrong.

A. in my eye

B. in an eye

C. in eyes

D. in the eye

28. She told me that she would come _____.

A. next day

B. the next day

C. a next day

D. last day

29. She was working in _____ field when _____ sun was rising.

A. the; the

B. /; the

C. /;/

D. the;/

30. He is _____ tallest boy in our class.

A. a

B. the

C. /

D. one

31. _____ soon sent to _____ hospital.

A. The injured is; /

B. The injured were; /

C. An injured is; the

D. The injured were; the

32. Mary is _____ in our class.

A. Leifeng

B. the Leifeng

C. a Leifeng

D. one Leifeng

33. My grandparents always go to _____ church on _____ Sundays.

A. the; a

B. /; the

C. /; /

D. /; a

34. _____ Pacific Ocean is _____ largest ocean in the world.

A. The; the

B. /; the

C. /; a

D. /;/

35. It is _____ quick means to go to Beijing by _____ plane.

A. a; a

B. the; a

C. the; a

D. a;/

36. After _____ lunch I have _____ wonderful supper.

A. /; a

B. the; a

C. /;/

D. /; the

37. There are many trees _____ of our classroom.

A. in front

B. in the front

C. in a front

D. in fronts

38. I never read _____ because of my terrible eye-sight.

A. by night

B. in night

C. at the night

D. on night

39. I want to have _____ holiday, but I must go on _____ business.

A. /; a

B. a; a

C. a;/

D. /;/

40. Becky got _____ second in _____ physics examinations.

A. the;/

B. the; a

C. a;/

D. a; a

第三天

突破英语的数词、形容词和副词

3.1　数词

Tips：

作为数词来说，学生是要掌握其表达方法的，其实考试不会考单纯数词的表达法，最多是在中高级口译中可能会出现，但是即使是这样，也不会考写法，而是如何口头表达。所以在这一章中，我们重点要掌握的是数词几种特殊的用法。当然如果大家有兴趣以后做翻译的话，那么数词这一章就是特别重要的了。

1. 数词的定义及特征

（1）数词是表示数目多少及其顺序的一类词。

（2）数词可以分为基数词（表示数目多少）和序数词（表示数目顺序）两类。

2. 基数词

表3-1　基数词

1～12分别是

one two three four five six

seven eight nine ten eleven twelve

13～19分别后加-teen

thirteen fourteen fifteen sixteen

seventeen eighteen nineteen

20～90分别后加-ty

twenty thirty forty fifty

seventy sixty eighty ninety

几十几中间有“-”

21 twenty-one　94 ninety-four

一百以上的表达法

100 = a hundred

1 000 = a thousand

10 000 = ten thousand

100 000 = a hundred thousand

1 000 000 = a million

10 000 000 = ten million

100 000 000 = a hundred million

1 000 000 000 = a billion

数字表达的方式，如：23, 684, 345, 369

Tips：

在逗号之间不用and，逗号内部and连接

twenty-three billon six hundred and eighty-four million three hundred and forty five thousand three hundred and sixty-nine

3. 序数词

序数词第一、第二、第三分别为first，second，third，其他的后面都是加-th如forth，fifth，sixth等。

Tips：

十位数序数词的构成方法是：将-ty变y为i加-eth。

Twenty变成了twentieth，thirty变成了thirtieth等。这也是一种比较特殊的词尾变化。

Tips：

多位数的序数词是将前部保留为基数词，只有末尾变为序数词。

第2323个　two thousand three hundred and twenty third

4. 数词用法（几种特殊的表达）

（1）编号的表达遵循以下方式，需要记住以下两个公式

“the+编号（序）+号码名称（首字母大写）”　the 203rd Room（203房间）

“号码名称（首字母大写）+编号（基）”　Room 203（203房间）

（2）倍数、分数、小数、百分数的表达法

①倍数：This room is three times as large as that one.

这间房间比那间大三倍。

This room is three times larger than that one.

这间房间比那间大三倍。

②分数表达法：

1
— one — 基数词

2
— two — 基数词

3 — third — 序数词

3 — third — 序数词（复数）

③小数表达法：

5.36 five point three six

1.26 one point two six

④百分数表达法：

5% five per(cent)

60% sixty per(cent)

（3）数式的表达法

加法：One and one is two.

减法：One minus one is zero.

乘法：Two times two is four.

除法：Two divided by two is one.

（4）年、月、日的表达法

1986年8月7日用英语表达为August 7th或7th August，nineteen eighty-six。

Tips：

2008年应该说成two thousand and eight而不是twenty eight。

*十二个月的写法（缩写）：

Jan. Feb. Mar. Apr. May. Jun. Jul. Aug. Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec.

Tips：

一般不要求大家掌握其全部拼写方法，即使是在考试中用缩写也就可以了。

（5）时间表达法

①直接表达法（美式） 9:20 nine twenty

②间接表达法（英式） 9:45 a quarter to ten

Tips：

过半用to，不过用past，一半用half，一刻用a quarter。

e.g.: 9:20　twenty past nine

9:30　half past nine

9:45　a quarter to ten

小结：
本章中数词的学习十分简单，大家不需掌握数字的具体表达法，要清晰地掌握数字的各种特殊用法，特别是编号、倍数、分数等用法。

回答下列问题：

（1）346294如何用英语表达？第34862077个用英语如何表达？

（2）编号表达法的公式是什么？

（3）数学上的加、减、乘、除，小数、分数、代分数、百分数和倍数用英语如何表达？

（4）时间、年、月、日如何表达？

如果以上这些问题能够毫不犹豫地回答的话，那么数词的学习目的也就达到了。

3.2　形容词和副词

Tips：

形容词和副词是英语中作修饰成分最重要的两类词，经常有这样一副对联：

上联：形容词作定语翻译成“……的”修饰名词或代词

下联：副词作状语翻译成“……地”修饰动词、形容词和副词

横批：动词是谓语，谓语是动词

这样三行字指导了英语语法学习的根本方法，要想把语法学好，必须先把修饰成分分析清楚，这样才可能做到不受这些成分的影响而自由地把握句子的语法成分。形容词和副词的位置及形容词副词的比较级是本章最重要的部分。

1. 形容词

（1）形容词的定义及用法

形容词是用来修饰名词或代词的一类词。它的作用一般是作定语、表语或宾语补足语。

e.g.: She is a very beautiful
girl.

她是一个漂亮的姑娘。（定语）

e.g.: They are quite friendly
.

他们十分友好。（表语）

e.g.: I made the door closed
.

我把门关上了。（宾语补足语）

（2）形容词的位置

①一般形容词修饰名词时要放在它前面。

e.g.: He is a very handsome
man.

他是一个十分帅气的小伙子。

e.g.: a weak small
old man.

一个虚弱的小老头

②当形容词修饰复合不定代词时，要放在它后面。

e.g.: I have something important
to tell you.

我有重要的事情告诉你。

③当有多个形容词修饰名词时，遵循：“美小圆旧黄，法国木书房”（重要口诀）顺序。即：描绘性形容词、大小、形状、新旧、颜色、国别、材料和中心词。

e.g.: the first beautiful little white Chinese stone bridge

中国第一座美丽的小白石桥

Tips：

如果有冠词和数词修饰时，要将其放在首位。

some famous young Austrian reporters

一些年轻著名的奥地利记者

2. 副词

（1）副词的定义

副词是用来修饰动词、形容词、副词以及全句的一类词。

e.g.: She is quite
nice.

她是十分漂亮。（副词修饰形容词时放在其前面）

They ran faster
than us.

他们比我们跑得快。（副词修饰动词时放在动词后面）

Thank you very
much.

非常感谢。（副词very修饰副词much时放在被修饰词前面）

Unfortunately
, he lost his suitcase.

很不走运，他把箱子弄丢了。（一个副词修饰一句话时，放在句首或是句末。）

（2）副词的种类

①副词按形式可分为3种。

- 简单副词：just 刚刚　only 仅仅　up 向上

- 复合副词：therefore 因此　nonetheless 然而

- 派生副词：happily 幸福地　interestingly 有趣地

Tips：

这一类的副词是由形容词的词尾加-ly而变成的。

e.g.: slow → slowly

happy → happily

Tips：

但有一类词既可以是形容词又可以是副词，且在加-ly后还有副词的形式，要注意它们的用法。

e.g.: The bird can't fly that high.

鸟不能那么高。（具体的含义）

President Xi has highly praised the relationship between the U.S. and China.

习主席高度评价了中美之间的关系。（抽象的含义）

Tips：

所以，当副词和形容词同体时，由形容词在词尾加上-ly变成的副词就是表示抽象含义，而前者则是具体含义。

②副词按意义可分为5种。

- 方式副词：interestingly 有趣地　happily 高兴地

- 地点和方位副词：out 外面　up 向上　down 向下

- 时间副词：today 今天　tomorrow 明天

- 强调副词：very 非常　quite 十分　so 太

- 频率副词：sometimes 有时　often 经常　usually 通常

（3）副词的位置

副词的位置不像形容词的位置较固定，它们十分灵活，有以下几种规律。

①频率副词一般用于be动词之后，实义动词之前。

e.g.: She often
gets up at 6 everyday.

他通常在六点钟起床。

She is often
good at drawing.

她很擅长绘画。

②表示地点和时间的副词一般都在句末或句首。

e.g.: He has had supper tonight
.

他今天晚上已经吃过饭了。

In the middle of
the classroom there is a big tree.

教室中间有一棵大树。

③副词中时间副词和地点副词可修饰名词，放在后面。

e.g.: The people there
are having lunch.

那儿的人正在吃饭。

The river below
runs very fast.

下面那条河流的很快。

3. 形容词和副词的比较等级

Tips：

比较级和比较等级是两个完全不同的概念，而且要注意两者之间的关系。

形容词和副词的比较等级一般分为三种：原级、比较级和最高级。

（1）三个比较等级的用法（基本用法）

①原级的使用

He is as tall as I (me).

他和我一样高。

形式：主语 + 动词 + as + 形容词原级 + as + 比较对象。

否定形式：主语 + 动词（not）+ so + 形容词原级 + as + 比较对象。

意义：“……和……一样”。

②比较级的使用

He is taller than I (me).

他比我高。

形式：主语 + 动词 + 形容词比较级形式 + than + 比较对象。

意义：“……比……”。

③最高级的使用

He is the tallest of all.

他是我们中最高的。

形式：主语 + 动词 + the + 形容词最高级 + 比较范围。

意义：“……最……”。（某一范围的最……。）

Tips：

在比较的过程中一定要注意是什么比较，千万不要弄错比较对象。如下句：

The weather in Kunming is warmer than Beijing.

本句是昆明天气和北京的天气相比较，而不是昆明天气和北京比较。本句则应是：

The weather in Kunming is warmer than that of Beijing.

昆明的天气比北京暖和。

（2）形容词和副词的比较等级变化一般依据以下的规则

①形容词比较等级

表3-2　形容词比较等级

情况

原级

比较级

最高级

重读闭音节双写词尾字母加-er, -est

big

bigger

biggest

辅音字母+y结尾，变y为i加-er, -est

happy

happier

happiest

不发音e结尾直接加-r, -st

simple

simpler

simplest

双音节或多音节词，在词前加more和the most

beautiful

more beautiful

the most beautiful

*还有以下的特殊变化是需要记忆的。

表3-3　形容词比较等级的特殊变化

原级

比较级

最高级

good, well

better

best

bad, badly, ill

worse

worst

many, much

more

most

little

less

least

far

further, farther

furthest, furthest

old

older, elder

oldest, eldest

Tips：

表3-3中further与furthest是far的比较级和最高级，但是further是“进一步”的意思，furthest现已很少使用。

e.g.: He jumps farther than I (do).

他比我跳得远。（在这里是具体的距离）

I want to get further information about it.

我想得到关于这件事情的进一步消息。（在这里是抽象的“远”）

Tips：

elder与eldest也是old的比较级和最高级，主要表示兄弟姐妹的长幼关系。

e.g.: I have a younger sister and an elder sister.

我有个妹妹，也有个姐姐。（在这里elder表示的是辈分上的，而不是年纪上的。）

I am older than you.

我比你年纪大。（实际上指的是年龄上的。）

②副词的比较等级要遵循以下的原则：

- 它类似于形容词的比较级；

- 它的最高级前不加the。

Tips：

在这里要考虑为什么不加the，因为副词和形容词的用法不一样，形容词是用来修饰名词的，而名词前必须有冠词来说明名词，但是副词则是用来修饰副词、形容词和动词的，所以不需要用冠词。

- 由形容词派生出来的副词变化比较级时，要在词前加more和most。

slowly是由slow变化来的，它的比较级和最高级分别是more slowly和most slowly，而不是slowlier和slowliest。

（3）形容词和副词的比较等级的用法（特殊用法）

①比较级前可用many, much, a little, a few, a bit, a great (good) deal, a lot修饰。

e.g.: He is a bit
better than before.

他比以前好一些了。

She is a little
weaker than him.

他比她虚弱一点。

②最高级可用序数词much, by far等修饰。

e.g.: Wangbing is by far
the tallest of all.

王兵是所有人中最高的。

The Changjiang River is the first
longest river in China.

长江是中国最长的河流。

③“比较级+比较级”表示“越来越……”。

e.g.: more and more 越来越多

faster and faster 越来越快

④“the+比较级，the+比较级”表示“越……，就越……”。

e.g.: The more, the better.

越多越好。

The harder
you work, the more
progress you will make.

你越努力学习，你取得的进步就越大。

⑤用最高级表示比较级。

e.g.: Wangbing and Wanghai are brothers.

Wanghai is the taller
of the two.

王兵和王海是兄弟。王海是他们两中最高的。

Tips：

句型结构为最高级结构，但是表示的是比较含义，因为两个人中最高的也就是一个比另一个高。特别要注意 the taller的用法。

⑥用比较级表示最高级。

e.g.: She is taller than anyone else
in her class. = She is the tallest in her class.

她在她们班比其他任何人都高。

She is taller than anyone
in Class Three. = She is the tallest in Class Three.

她在三班是比其他任何人都高的人。

Tips：

前一句是在范围内比较，而后一句却在范围外比较，注意区别不同情况。

⑦用原级表示比较级。

e.g.: The rope is too long (than I needed/expected).

这根绳子太长了。

（实际上表示的含义是比需要的绳子长度要长。）

e.g.: It is rather hot.

天气太热了。

（实际上可能表示比前几天都要热。）

⑧最高级前使用数词的情况。

e.g.: The Changjiang River is the first
longest river in China.

长江是中国最长的河流。（使用序数词时后面名词使用单数）

e.g.: The Changjiang River is one of the longest rivers in China.

长江是中国最长的河流之一。（使用基数词时后面名词使用复数）

小结：
在本章中我们学习了形容词和副词的基本用法，最重要的是形容词和副词的位置及其比较等级。其中形容词和副词的比较等级的用法在考试中出现频率最高的。

请回答下列问题：

（1）形容词修饰名词时的位置一般有几种？

（2）副词修饰副词、动词和形容词时的位置有几种?

（3）形容词和副词比较级的基本形式如何？

（4）形容词和副词比较级的特殊形式如何？

如果大家对这几个问题没有疑惑的话，那么第三天的学习就很成功了，下面几天的学习任务将会很重，因为明天要进入英语中最重要的动词的学习。不过没有关系，只要大家坚持，就一定能够在短时间内突破这些看起来很难的语法现象了。

数词练习

1. — How soon can I take a bus downtown?

— There is a bus passing here _____.

A. every five minute

B. five minutes

C. every fifth minute

D. every five minutes

2. David is ten years old and his cousin is just _____.

A. twice as older as he

B. as twice old as he

C. twice his age

D. twice elder than he

3. The _____ died three weeks ago.

A. two-head-baby

B. two-heads-baby

C. two-head baby

D. two-head babys

4. Uncle Wang bought _____ eggs yesterday.

A. two dozens

B. two dozen

C. two dozens of

D. dozens

5. _____ soldiers died during World War Two.

A. Ten thousand of

B. Tens of thousands of

C. Ten-thousands of

D. Tens of thousand of

6. There are _____ words we have learned this term.

A. five thousand

B. five thousands

C. five thousands of

D. the five thousand

7. He has been to Shanghai _____.

A. at twenty old

B. at the age of his twenties

C. in his twenties

D. in his twenty

8. The Nanjing Changjiang Bridge is about _____.

A. 6, 700 metre long

B. 6, 700 metres of long

C. 6, 700 meters long

D. long 6, 700 meters

9. Please turn to _____.

A. Page ten

B. Page of ten

C. Page tenth

D. tenth page

10. She taught in this school in _____.

A. 1980's

B. 1980s'

C. the 1980's

D. the 1980s'

11. About _____ people disagreed with what president said.

A. three seventh

B. three of seven

C. three sevenths

D. three seven

12. _____ geese died of disease.

A. Scores

B. Scores of

C. The scores of

D. Score of

13. _____ dollars is a large sum.

A. Eight thousands hundred

B. Eight hundred

C. Eight hundred of thousand

D. Eight hundred of thousand

14. _____, please allow me to introduce Professor Fan.

A. Of all first

B. First all of

C. All of first

D. First of all

15. Ten years _____ a long time.

A. is

B. are

C. to be

D. being

16. Your books _____ as many as mine.

A. are five times

B. is five time

C. is fifth time

D. are fifth time

17. The output of steel in May makes _____ the total.

A. 10%

B. 10% of

C. 10% in

D. 10% for

18. It took me _____ to finish my homework.

A. one and half hours

B. a half and an hour

C. an hour and half

D. one and a half hours

19. — Do you have money?

— I have a _____ note.

A. hundred dollar

B. hundred-dollars

C. hundred-dollar

D. hundreds-dollar

形容词和副词练习

1. Their beautiful smiles showed that they were having a _____ picnic.

A. serious

B. friendly

C. lively

D. wonderful

2. I find that records are often _____ an actual performance.

A. as good

B. as good as

C. good as

D. as well as

3. — What do you think of his speech?

— Oh, it is _____.

A. a great fun

B. quite a interesting

C. very interesting

D. much interesting

4. If the doctor came earlier yesterday, _____ babies would not have been dead.

A. the all poor little

B. all the little poor

C. all the poor little

D. the all little poor

5. The old lady lived in a _____ house.

A. big red two-storied

B. red two-story big

C. two-story red big

D. red big two-storied

6. — I love your garden and it's so neat.

— Well, the smaller the garden is, _____ to look after it.

A. it is easier

B. the easy it is

C. it is easily

D. the easier it is

7. I'm surprised that you should have been fooled by such a (an) _____ trick.

A. ordinary

B. easy

C. smart

D. simple

8. In that case, there is nothing you can do _____ than wait.

A. more

B. other

C. better

D. any

9. It was _____ five people seemed crowed.

A. so small a car that

B. so a small car

C. such small a car that

D. a such small car

10. — Let's go for a walk?

— I'm sorry. I'm too busy now, please phone me _____ time.

A. some other

B. some others

C. any other

D. the other

11. Please tell me _____ about this trip.

A. something interested

B. interested something

C. interesting something

D. something interesting

12. The two boys look exactly _____.

A. the same

B. like

C. alike

D. likely

13. There are apples and oranges. Which do you like _____?

A. better

B. well

C. much

D. very much

14. We have six teachers. Who do you like _____?

A. better

B. best

C. the best

D. the better

15. Please be quiet. The baby falls _____.

A. asleeping

B. sleepy

C. asleep

D. slept

16. I have never seen _____.

A. a three-hundreds-year-old tree

B. a three-hundred-year-old tree

C. a three hundred year old tree

D. a three-hundred-years-old tree

17. Our school will hold a sports meeting _____ the next week.

A. some time

B. sometime

C. sometimes

D. some times

18. _____ place!

A. What a lively

B. What lively a

C. How lively

D. How a lively

19. Although he was not very clear, his teacher spoke _____ of him.

A. high

B. highly

C. bad

D. badly

20. — Did you buy those trousers?

— No, the price is _____ expensive for me.

A. very much

B. highly

C. so much

D. much too

21. — How big are your shoes?

— My shoes are _____ yours.

A. as twice big as

B. as big twice as

C. as big as twice

D. twice as big as

22. Keep you feet _____ while I fasten your shoes.

A. quite

B. silent

C. calm

D. still

23. — What can I do for you?

— May I have _____ coffee?

A. some

B. any

C. anyone

D. many

24. — Do you know _____?

— They will be our classmates.

A. the two beautiful young girls

B. the beautiful young two girls

C. the two young beautiful girls

D. the young beautiful two girls

25. His suggestion is worthy _____.

A. to consider

B. of considering

C. of being considered

D. considering

26. My handwriting _____ yours.

A. is not as good as

B. are not as good as

C. is not good as

D. is not as well as

27. She is _____ of my two sisters.

A. the cleverest

B. the cleverer

C. cleverer

D. as clever as

28. He went to school much _____.

A. late yesterday

B. yesterday late

C. lately yesterday

D. yesterday lately

29. The family _____ is so noisy.

A. which next door

B. it was next door

C. next to the door

D. was next door

30. My friends are _____ teachers.

A. mostly

B. many

C. most

D. more

31. He is one of _____.

A. the greatest alive poet

B. the greatest alive poets

C. the greatest poets who are still alive

D. the greatest poet who are still alive

32. The Yellow River is _____ in China.

A. the second longest river

B. the second longest rivers

C. a second longest river

D. the second longer river

33. We were _____ when we won the football match.

A. rather pleasing

B. rather pleased

C. rather pleasure

D. rather please

34. Although Albert Einstein was a great scientist, you can't say he is _____.

A. wonderful

B. perfect

C. complete

D. splendid

35. Work hard and you'll be _____ in the future.

A. succeed

B. success

C. successful

D. successfully

36. All people in the world are trying their best to make the earth more _____.

A. beauty

B. beautify

C. beautifully

D. beautiful

37. Would you please give me some _____ information besides this?

A. far

B. farther

C. farthest

D. further

38. Mary is a _____ girl and John is a _____ boy.

A. handsome; beautiful

B. beautiful; handsome

C. handsome; handsome

D. beautiful; beautiful

39. A _____ lecture often makes students _____.

A. boring; boring

B. bored; boring

C. bored; bored

D. boring; bored

40. John is ill badly, please send for a doctor _____.

A. as sooner as possible

B. as soon as possibly

C. as soon as possible

D. soon as possible

41. — Would you like to have a dinner with me?

— Are you _____?

A. free

B. careful

C. serious

D. true

42. Henry said that he was _____ able to water the flowers himself.

A. too

B. much

C. very

D. quite

43. Peter is _____ fun that we all like him very much.

A. such a great

B. such great

C. so great

D. so a great

44. He is the only boy _____ for the monitor position.

A. lively

B. probably

C. possibly

D. possible

45. The village is only three hundred meters _____ from here.

A. away

B. far away

C. far

D. faraway

46. — Could you tell me where the nearest post office is?

— Go _____ and turn _____ at the first turning.

A. straightly; left

B. straight; left

C. straight; the left

D. straightly; the left

47. All the _____ are interested in the _____.

A. present students; present situation

B. present students; situation present

C. students present; present situation

D. students present; situation present

48. Some students are playing basketball while the other students _____.

A. are still doing their homework

B. are already doing their homework

C. are now doing their homework

D. are doing their homework now

49. Light travels _____ than sound.

A. too fast

B. much fast

C. very faster

D. much faster

50. The weather was _____ hot yesterday.

A. very

B. pretty

C. rather

D. fairly

51. Jenny did _____ well in her exam, but you did _____ badly.

A. rather; more

B. rather; fairly

C. fairly; rather

D. pretty; too

52. He is _____ to go to school by himself.

A. old enough

B. enough old

C. young enough

D. enough young

53. I'm _____ at English while my sister does _____ in politics.

A. good; good

B. well; well

C. good; well

D. well; good

54. — Are you excited about your university life?

— _____.

A. Yes, very excited

B. Yes, very exciting

C. No, very bored

D. No, nothing at all

55. — There are no mistakes in your paper.

— Yes. I cannot be too _____.

A. nervous

B. careful

C. careless

D. happy

56. The town was so _____, and I didn't know where to go.

A. strange

B. large

C. interesting

D. beautiful

57. I can't put this big television _____.

A. everywhere

B. somewhere

C. anywhere

D. nowhere

58. You look _____ than you are.

A. a more younger

B. more younger

C. very younger

D. much younger

59. He is _____ fatter than me.

A. very

B. much

C. so

D. too

60. The old lady lived _____, but she never felt _____.

A. alone; lonely

B. lonely; alone

C. lone; lonely

D. alone; lone

61. This is a _____ building in this city.

A. much tall

B. pretty tall

C. prettily tall

D. tall pretty

62. Was the dog _____ or dead?

A. alive

B. lively

C. live

D. living

63. He hurt _____ in a _____ night.

A. bad; dark

B. badly; dark

C. bad; darker

D. badly; darkly

64. Who can manage to do this job with _____ money and _____ people?

A. little; less

B. little; fewer

C. less; fewer

D. less; few

65. This picture was painted one thousand years ago. So it is _____.

A. costless

B. worthless

C. valuable

D. priceless

66. He is _____ of his _____ behavior.

A. shameful; ashamed

B. shameful; shameless

C. shameless; ashamed

D. ashamed; shameful

67. The apples are _____ pears.

A. twice as many as

B. as many as twice

C. twice as much as

D. as twice many as

68. Please keep _____ when you meet a sudden dangerous situation.

A. quite

B. clam

C. still

D. silent

69. Although it was raining _____, yet _____ no one stopped working.

A. heavy; nearly

B. heavily; nearly

C. heavy; almost

D. heavily; almost

70. — Will the exam be difficult?

— No, it's _____ that all of the students can pass it.

A. surely

B. certainly

C. sure

D. certain

71. I have never spent a _____ day.

A. more worrying

B. most worrying

C. more worry

D. most worried

72. When we got to Mountain Tai, we saw the _____ sun rising.

A. burnt

B. gold

C. golden

D. brightly

73. _____, I think you are wrong.

A. Honest

B. Be honest

C. To be honest

D. Honest to say

74. How delicious it is! I’ve never eaten a _____ dinner.

A. good

B. excellent

C. worse

D. better

75. — When shall we meet?

— Make it _____ you like. It's the same to me.

A. sometime

B. any time

C. sometimes

D. every time

76. He didn't go to see a film. I didn't go, _____.

A. too

B. also

C. to

D. either

77. South Africa is _____ country.

A. an English-spoken

B. a speaking-English

C. a spoken-English

D. an English-speaking

78. Those who are _____ with the progress they have made will have not greater success.

A. proud

B. afraid

C. popular

D. content

79. — Who is _____ to win the game?

— I think it is _____ for Peter to win.

A. probably; likely

B. possible; probably

C. likely; probably

D. likely; possible

80. I have four sisters, all _____ than me. _____ Jenny is a teacher.

A. elder; The eldest

B. older; The older

C. elder; The old one

D. older; The eldest

第四天

突破英语的动词及其两种时态

4.1　动词

Tips：

动词是英语中最重要的语法现象，在英语所有的句型结构中，动词是必然出现的。在英语中，任何一个句子可以没有主语、宾语、定语等，但是谓语是必然要有的。这一点刚好和中文的语法有所不同，例如中文中说：他今年十八岁了。这句话中主语是他，谓语可以理解为十八岁，也就是说数词是可以作为谓语的。如果这句翻译成英语：He is eighteen years old this year. 而不是He eighteen years old. 可见英语中谓语动词的重要性。

在3.2中提到了一个对联，它的横批是“动词是谓语，谓语是动词。”希望大家能掌握的就是动词必然用来做谓语，谓语必然是动词的道理，一个句子如果没有了谓语也就不成为句子。既然动词这么重要，那么我们学习的方法是什么呢？大家要在脑海里深深地刻下这样一条主线：动词的定义—分类—基本形式—动词词组—时态—语态—助动词和情态动词—非谓语动词—虚拟语气。把结构性的框架放在脑海里，只需要我们把其他的内容往里面填进去就可以了。现在就让我们一起先进入动词的定义、分类、基本形式、动词词组以及动词的前两种基本时态吧。

1. 动词的定义和分类

（1）动词是用来表示动作和状态的词。

e.g.: He gets up
at 6 every day.

他每天在6点钟起床。（在这里“起床”实际上是一个动作。）

The earth moves around the sun.

地球绕着太阳转。（在这里“绕着”实际上就是一种状态。）

（2）动词的分类

动词按照其在句子当中的用途可以为以下4类：

①实义动词（notional verb，又称行为动词），是用来表动作或状态的，能单独作谓语。

e.g.: I wash
my hair every day.

我每天洗头。

He often goes
to school at 7 o'clock.

他经常7点钟去上学。

I. 实义动词按照其后可否带宾语又可分为：及物动词和不及物动词两种。

e.g.: I got up
（不及物动词（vi.））
early so that I could catch
（及物动词（vt.））
the bus.

但有时这种情况也会出现，即：一个动词既是及物动词又是不及物动词。（以fly为例）：

e.g.: The boy flies
a kite.

男孩放风筝。（及物动词）

e.g.: Birds can fly
.

鸟儿会飞。（不及物动词）

- 及物动词：在动词后直接出现人或物的动词。

e.g.: I am reading
a book.

我正在读书。

They are looking
at the blackboard.

他们正在看黑板。

- 不及物动词：有两种理解方式

a. 在动词后不出现宾语，直接成主谓结构。

e.g.: I can fly
.

我会飞。（后面没有宾语，can fly直接就是谓语）

b. 在动词后加上介宾短语作宾语的动词。

e.g.: He is standing
on the top of the mountain.

他正站在山顶上。（动词后面跟了一个介词短语直接构成状语）

Tips：

在这里首先提出，及物动词和不及物动词可以单独做谓语，但是不及物动词一般不能用于被动语态当中。

II. 实义动词按照动词的持续性来分类，又可以分为持续性动词和短暂性动词。比方说go，eat，play，watch等都是持续性动词；又比方说buy，die等就是短暂性动词。

Tips：

一般来说，短暂性动词不能用于完成时态。

e.g.: I have already finished my homework.

我已经完成家庭作业了。（finish是一个持续性动词，所以可以用于现在完成时态。）

I have bought this car for three years.

我已经买这辆车三年了。（因为buy这个单词不是持续性动词，所这句话就错了，应该写成I have kept this car for three years.）

III. 实义动词按照动作位置的改变程度又可以分为位移动词和非位移动词。比方说come, go, leave等就是位移动词；又比方说finish, buy, listen, see等就是非位移动词。

Tips：

一般来说，位移动词要用一般现在时态和现在进行时态代替一般将来时态。

e.g.: The train will leave at 3 o'clock.

火车三点钟要走了。

因为leave是一个位移动词，所以在这里应该用一般现在时态和现在进行时态来代替一般将来时态，所以这句话可以写成：

The train leaves at 3 o'clock. / The train is leaving at 3 o'clock.

Tips：

以上3种分类都是人为分类，是为了说明某种语言用法而分，而不是规定。

②联系动词：是用来表示不定主谓语关系的动词，它说明真正的谓语（即表语），而且不可以单独做谓语。

e.g.: He is a good student.

他是一个好学生。

e.g.: The trees turned
green.

树变绿了。

联系动词可分为3类：

- be动词：am、is、are等。

Tips：

在这里需要强调的是be动词不一定是联系动词，因为be动词还可以作助动词，联系动词也不一定就是be动词，因为联系动词还包括感官动词和性质变化动词，这两者之间在一定程度上有交叉，在后面助动词的用法中我们还会重点讲授这个问题。

e.g.: We are
boys.

我们是男孩。

I am
thirsty.

我口渴了。

Tips：

我们经常说的主语补足语实际上就是表语，因为表语在某些程度上就是说明了主语的特征和性质。

•感官动词：由身体某器官可感知的动词，如：hear（听到，听说），look（看），smell（闻到），taste（品尝）等。

e.g.: The food tastes
delicious.

这食物尝起来很好吃。

The piece of music sounds
beautiful.

这首歌听起来很悦耳。

•性质变化动词：由某种状态变化到某种状态时所用的一类动词，如set（移到），turn（变得），become（变成，成为）, grow（变得）等。

e.g.: The girl became
a doctor.

这个女孩成了医生。

The population grows
larger and larger.

人口变得越来越多。

③助动词：用来帮助动词形成时态、语态、语气的一种动词，它本身无意义或意义不完全，不能单独作谓语。

e.g.: He is
having lunch now.

他现在正在吃午饭。

The woman was
killed in the accident.

那个女人在事故中丧身了。

常见的助动词有be动词，do, have, shall, will, should, would等。

④情态动词：是用来表示陈述者态度的一种动词。

它的意义不完整，必须和后面的实义动词连用，且必须和不带to的动词不定式连用（ought, have除外），它不能单独作谓语动词，且一般没有人称和数的变化。

常见的情态动词有must, should, have to, ought to等。

e.g.: You mustn't
play with knife, because it is so sharp.

你不能玩小刀，它很锋利。

We should
try our best to make contributions to our country.

我们要努力为国家做出贡献。

The girl need
finish her homework in five days.

这个女孩须在五天之内完成家庭作业。

2. 动词的基本形式

英语中动词的形式有5种，分别是：动词原形，第三人称单数，过去式，过去分词和现在分词，这5种形式和助动词连用构成了不同的时态、语态和语气。

表4-1　动词的基本形式

Tips：

动词的屈折变化比较多，特别是第三人称单数形式（在一般现在时中附注），过去式（在一般过去时附注），过去分词（在现在完成时中附注），现在分词（现在进行时附注）比较复杂，我们将在以后的学习中进一步讨论。但是如果我们仔细想想的话，实际上第三人称单数只能在一般现在时态的第三人称单数中使用，动词的过去式只能在一般过去时态当中使用，所以也就剩下三个动词形式，这点在印欧系中最简单。在其他语言中，以西班牙语为例，一个动词的基本变化达到了上百种之多，这样一想，实际上英语也就简单多了。

3. 动词词组

动词词组的形式多种多样，有动词和副词构成的，有动词和介词构成的，也有动词和副词和介词构成的，等等。

look at 动词+介词构成

look up 动词+副词构成

look forward to 动词+副词+介词构成

pay attention to 动词+副词+介词构成

Tips：

很多英语大师曾经说过，能把英语中简单的动词词组牢记在心，也就不要背什么生词了。拿look这个单词来说，字典上列出了有不下五十种的动词搭配，如果大家可以活学活用，英语的学习将不再是一件难事了。当然。在这里不是讨论如何背诵这些词组的问题，而是要在这其中发现一些用法和规律。

请看以下八个短语，并判断对错：

（1）look at the word

（2）look the word at

（3）look up the word

（4）look the word up

（5）look at it

（6）look it at

（7）look up it

（8）look it up

（1）是正确的，因为look at后面要带宾语。

（2）是错误的，因为look在这里是不及物动词，不能直接加宾语。

（3）是正确的，因为look up后面是可以带宾语的。

（4）是正确的，因为在这里look似乎可以认为是及物动词。

（5）是正确的。因为look at后面要带宾语。

（6）是错误的，因为look在这里是不及物动词，不能直接加宾语。

（7）是错误的，因为有代词的时候，在动词+副词的短语中，代词只能放在动词后，不能放在副词后。

（8）是正确的，因为有代词的时候，在动词+副词的短语中，代词只能放在动词后，不能放在副词后。

很多同学看完这段解释后还是不明白，再说得更明白些：实际上，look at是个动词+介词的短语，在这种短语中一般认为look是不及物动词，所以后面不能直接加宾语，不论是代词还是名词，当然look at是不能拆开来用的；然而look up是个动词+副词的短语，在这种短语中一般认为look是及物动词，所以后面可以直接加宾语，但是又出现代词的时候，在动词+副词的短语中，代词只能放在动词后，不能放在副词后。这时大家再看看我的解释，是不是更加明白了呢？

请大家回答下列问题：

（1）动词主要可以分为几大类？

（2）实义动词可以怎样进行分类？

（3）动词的基本形式有哪些？

（4）动词的词组，特别是动词+副词和动词+介词各有什么样的特点？

如果大家可以把这些问题弄明白的话，那么动词的入门学习就已经达到目的了，在接下来的学习中还有很多的动词知识点需要加以捉摸和体会啊！

4.2　动词的时态

Tips：

动词的时态、语态和语气一般被称为动词的三要素，在三个现象中又以动词的时态最为繁杂，大家在学习时态的时候，一定要遵循以下这样的一条主线：定义—图示—结构—用法（基本用法和特殊用法）—比较。还是那句话，语法结构性意义十分重要。

时态是动词中的一个语法范畴，是以动词的不同的形式表达在不同时间和不同行为方式中所发生的不同动作。

按时间方面可分为：现在、过去、将来和过去将来4部分。

按动作方面可分为：进行、完成、一般现在和完成进行4部分。

这样一来时态就可分为16种，我们要讨论的是以下的11种。

（1）一般现在时

①定义：一般现在时是表示说话人经常发生或近一段时间内发生的动作或存在的状态。

e.g.: I go to
school everyday.

我每天去上学。

He runs
faster than you.

他比你跑得快。

这样一些句子都是在陈述一般性的事实和主语的某种状态。

②图示（下面以数学中的数轴来表示）：

Tips：

这种数轴表达时态的方法是我根据牛津大学某本著名的语法书上借鉴来的，因为这样的方法可以让大家一目了然地了解到时态是怎样发生的。根据定义，可以把一般现在时在数轴上表示，一定要注意看数轴上的斜体部分，它既可表示在过去、现在，而且也表示可能在将来发生的动作或存在的状态。所以，一般现在时态在英语中可以说是时间跨度最大的时态之一。

③结构：在结构中，主要将动词分为实义动词（work为例）和be动词的两种情况。（如表4-1所示）

Tips：

值得一提的是，在一般现在时中，我们要注意当遇到第三人称单数时，动词不能用原形，要用我们在说动词基本形式中所提到的第三人称单数形式（又称“单三”或是“三单”）。“单三”形式的变化主要是在动词后加-s（类似于名词变复数）。如表4-2所示。

表4-2　“单三”的动词变化

动词

肯定式

否定式

be

I am ... .

He/She/It is ... .

We/You/They are ... .

I am not ... .

He/She/It is not ... .

We/You/They are not ... .

work

I work.

He/She/It works.

We/You/They work.

I do not work.

He/She/It does not work.

We/You/They do not work.

表4-3　疑问式和简答式

动词

第一人称

第二人称

第三人称

be

Am I ...?

Yes, you are.

No, you are not.

Are we ...?

Yes, we/you are.

No, we/you are not.

Are you ...?

Yes, I am.

No, I am not.

Are you ... .

Yes, we are.

No, we are not.

Is he/she/it ...?

Yes, he/she/it is.

No, he/she/it is not.

Are they ...?

Yes, they are.

No, they are not.

work

Do I work?

Yes, you do.

No, you do not.

Do you work?

Yes, I do.

No, I do not.

Does he/she/it work?

Yes, he/she/it does.

No, he/she/it does not.

Do they work?

Yes, they do.

No, they do not.

表4-4　“单三”动词变化总结

情况

例词

一般在词尾加-s，清辅音后，读/s/。

浊辅音后，读/z/。

look—looks

read—reads

在/s/、/z/、/　/、/ /、/ /、/　/后加-es，读/iz/。

teach—teaches

watch—watches

以辅音字母加y结尾变y为i加-es，读/iz/。

fly—flies

apply—applies

④用法（在我们介绍每个时态时，把用法分为基本用法和特殊用法。）

基本用法：

•根据定义，一般现在时主要用于表示说话人这一段时间内所发生的动作和存在的状态。

e.g.: He likes
China very much.

他很喜欢中国。

I put
some apples on the desk.

我把一些苹果放在桌子上。

They walk
to the park every day.

他们每天去公园散步。

•表示说话人习惯和能力。

e.g.: My father is
a worker.

我的父亲是一个工人。

I swim
very well.

我游泳很好。

She goes
to work by car.

她开车去上班。

•表示一般的客观事实。

e.g.: The earth goes
around the sun.

地球围着太阳转。

Knowledge is
power.

知识就是力量。

Light travels
faster than sound.

光比声音跑得快。

特殊用法：

•一般现在时谓语中出现go, come, arrive, start, sail等动词（位移动词）时，要用一般现在时表示将要发生的事，且这类事主要表示事先安排好的，即将要发生的。

e.g.: The plane arrives
at 9 a.m.

这架飞机早上九点钟到。

The film starts
at 7 p.m.

这场电影将在下午七点钟开演。

Where doses she go
?

她将要去哪儿？

•在时间或条件状语从句中，用一般时代替将来时。

Tips：

这点实际上就是我们所说的“主将从现”的语法现象。

e.g.: If it rains
tomorrow, the sports meeting will be put off.

如果明天下雨，运动会就将推迟。

When I become
an adult, I will be a doctor.

我长大了要成为一名医生。

（2）一般过去时

①定义：表示说话人在过去某一时间所发生的动作或存在的状态。

e.g.: I went
to the park yesterday night.

我昨天晚上去了公园。

She saw
a man climb the hill last week.

她上周看见一个男的爬山了。

这些都是在过去的某个时候发生的事情，有具体的时间状语，句子的谓语用的是动词的过去式。

②图示：

Tips：

根据定义可将一般过去时反映在此数轴上的斜线部分。这样大家就会明白原来动作是发生在过去的时间内，而且是和现在没有任何关系的，这和后面讲到的现在完成时态是有本质性区别的。

③结构

简而言之，一般过去时就是谓语动词用过去式表示。

还是以be动词和实义动词work为例（如表4-5所示）。

表4-5　一般过去时中动词的变化

动词

肯定式

否定式

be

I was….

You were….

He/She/It was….

We/You/They were….

I was not….

You were not….

He/She/It was not….

We/You/They were not….

work

I/You/He/She/

It/We/You/They worked

I/You/He/She/

It/We/You/They did not work.

动词

疑问式

回答

be

Was I…?

Were you…?

Was he/she/it…?

Were we/you/they…?

Yes, you were./ No, you were not.

Yes, I was./ No, I wasn't.

Yes, he/she/it was./ No, he/she/it wasn't.

Yes, you/we/they were.

No, you/we/they weren't.

work

Did I work?

Did you work?

Did he/she/it/work?

Did they work?

Yes, you did.

No, you did not.

Yes, I did.

No, I did not.

Yes, he/she/it did.

No, he/she/it did not.

Yes, they did.

No, they did not.

Tips：

动词过去式一般常在动词结尾加-ed，但也有特殊用法。

④用法

基本用法：

•表示过去某个时刻发生的动作或存在状态，且和过去具体时间连用（yesterday, last year /month/ week，in+年份、月份，on+过去某一天，... ago等）。

e.g.: I lived
in Beijing three years ago.

三年前我住在北京。

They repaired
the car last night.

他们昨天晚上修理了汽车。

Finally Mr. Smith caught
the thief yesterday.

昨天史密斯先生最终抓住了小偷。

•表示过去经常发生的动作，常和always，often等词连用。

表4-6　动词过去式

情况

例词

一般在词尾加-ed

walk—walked

look—looked

start—started

以不发音的e结尾直接加-d

care—cared

live—lived

like—liked

辅音字母+y结尾变y为i加-ed

carry—carried

satisfy—satisfied

supply—supplied

重读闭音节的词后双写词尾字母加-ed

stop—stopped

plan—planned

不规则动词

break—broke

catch—caught

see—saw

Tips：

实际上，英语中的不规则动词才是重点中的重点，一般来说，常用的动词都是不规则动词的。

e.g.: When I was
at collage, I always went
to the library.

当我还在上大学的时候，我经常去图书馆。

When she was
a girl, she often swam
this river.

当她还是个小女孩时，她经常来这河里游泳。

Tips：

经常有说关于频率副词的问题，实际上频率副词always, often, never, sometimes等是可以用于各种时态的，不一定就要用于一般现在时态当中。

特殊用法：

表示过去常常发生某事时，可常用used to do和would do两个词组，但两词有区别。

e.g.: I used to
smoke, but I have stopped.

我过去常吸烟，但现在已经戒了。（表示过去常常发生，现在不发生了。）

I would
smoke, and I smoke sometimes.

我过去常吸烟，现在有时还吸。（表示过去常常发生，现在不一定不发生。）

练习

1. If you don't know the word, why don't you _____ in the dictionary?

A. look at it

B. look after it

C. look up it

D. look it up

2. The horrible noise from the man's room simply _____ me mad.

A. put

B. caused

C. drove

D. turned

3. I can hardly hear the radio. Would you please _____?

A. turn it on

B. turn it down

C. turn it up

D. turn it off

4. — Do you think this hall can _____ 1000 people?

— I don't think so.

A. sit

B. manage

C. take

D. hold

5. I went to the forest to _____ the tiger there.

A. recognize

B. search

C. study

D. learn

6. The wooden house was _____ by the flood.

A. washed out

B. washed off

C. washed up

D. washed away

7. The clothes _____ me one thousand Yuan.

A. cost

B. took

C. used

D. spent

8. You must _____ the importance of studying foreign language.

A. learn by heart

B. know by heart

C. keep in mind

D. think of

9. When I invited him to have a dinner, he told me he was very busy and had not a minute to _____.

A. spend

B. save

C. share

D. spare

10. Please help me _____ my book that is on the ground.

A. keep up

B. lay up

C. look up

D. put up

11. My father _____ me to become a teacher.

A. thinks

B. says

C. hopes

D. wishes

12. All life in the earth _____ on the sun.

A. depends

B. carries

C. keeps

D. goes

13. The guests are coming. I must _____ the dinner.

A. get down to do prepare

B. get down to preparing

C. get used to prepare

D. look forward to preparing

14. She _____ my pen, then she _____ it to Jack.

A. borrowed; lent

B. borrowed; had lent

C. lent; had borrowed

D. lend; borrow

15. You'd better _____ what is right before making a decision.

A. look for

B. search for

C. find out

D. find

16. The farmer _____ rice in the field.

A. get along with

B. cut down

C. cut up

D. get in

17. Father won't _____ us to use his recorder.

A. have

B. let

C. agree

D. allow

18. I hope your speech can _____ some new points.

A. bring in

B. make up

C. take in

D. give in

19. He _____ to make it, but he failed again.

A. was trying

B. tried

C. was managing

D. managed

20. Whenever I saw the pretty girl, my heart would _____ fast.

A. run

B. beat

C. strike

D. hit

21. Many things are _____ iron.

A. made up

B. made from

C. made of

D. made into

22. David said he couldn't _____ one day away from studying.

A. waste

B. spend

C. cost

D. afford

23. Fire-fighters spent two hours _____ the fire.

A. putting on

B. putting up

C. putting off

D. putting out

24. Who can _____ the differences between these two leaves?

A. talk

B. tell

C. speak

D. say

25. Since you have made up your mind, you should _____ to carry out your plan.

A. set about

B. set off

C. set up

D. set out

26. My mother is _____ the big meal.

A. preparing for

B. preparing with

C. preparing

D. preparing about

27. How many pages have you _____ so far?

A. looked

B. seen

C. covered

D. turned

28. When you meet new words, you should _____ in the dictionary.

A. look through them

B. look them up

C. look up them

D. look down them

29. Reading books will _____ my taste for literature.

A. add

B. add up

C. add to

D. add up to

30. World War One _____ in 1914.

A. broke out

B. broke up

C. broke in

D. broke

31. The book _____ me.

A. is belong to

B. is belonged to

C. belongs to

D. belong to

32. That red suit _____ me.

A. doesn't fit

B. isn't fit

C. fits for

D. doesn't fit for

33. Jack is _____ a black jacket today.

A. having

B. put on

C. wearing

D. dressed

34. My mother always tells me to _____ my own things.

A. put away

B. put aside

C. put on

D. put up

35. Cheap coal _____ a lot of smoke.

A. gives up

B. gives in

C. gives away

D. gives off

36. All children should be _____ to having manners.

A. brought out

B. brought through

C. brought up

D. brought about

37. I _____ president to pay attention to pollution.

A. suggest

B. hope

C. make

D. beg

38. — You should have stopped smoking.

— Yes, but it is very difficult to _____.

A. get off

B. do away

C. get on

D. get rid of

39. Mr. White's daughter _____ Henry for two years.

A. married

B. was married

C. has been married with

D. has been married to

40. I _____ a invitation, but I didn't _____.

A. have received; accept

B. had received; accept

C. have accepted; receive

D. had accepted; receive

41. I found my son _____ on the table when I returned home.

A. laying

B. lying

C. lain

D. lied

42. Jenny _____ in the crowded street in order to find her friend.

A. looked for

B. looked through

C. looked around

D. looked forward to

43. The accident occurred when the plane was just _____.

A. taking away

B. taking out

C. taking off

D. taking up

44. The suit _____ me 100 dollars.

A. spent

B. cost

C. paid

D. took

45. The other day I _____ a bird but missed it.

A. shoot at

B. shot at

C. shoot

D. shot

46. I am _____ Beijing tomorrow morning.

A. arriving at

B. arriving in

C. getting

D. reaching at

47. How much did you _____ the radio?

A. pay for

B. pay off

C. pay back

D. pay out

48. Our water supply has been _____ for two days.

A. cut out

B. cut off

C. cut down

D. cut away

49. The bag is so heavy. Let me help you _____ it.

A. bring

B. carry

C. take

D. fetch

50. — Will somebody go and get Dr. White?

— He's always been _____.

A. asked for

B. sent for

C. called for

D. looked for

51. The old man can't hope to _____ his cancer in a few days.

A. get away

B. get off

C. get out

D. get over

第五天

突破英语的时态（一）

Tips：

本章主要突破英语中一般将来时、过去将来时、现在进行时、将来进行时和过去进行时。这5个时态很简单，希望大家把所有的例句背下来。

5.1　一般将来时

（1）定义：表示说话的人在将来某一时刻将要发生的动作或存在的状态。

Tips：

所有的将来时态（一般将来时、将来进行时、将来完成时和过去将来时）和其他时态不一样的地方在于：其他时态中所发生的动作已经发生、正在发生或是经常发生，但是只有将来时态的动作并没有发生。所以，我们在后面会讨论关于哪种将来时态发生动作可能性大的问题。

e.g.: I will enter
the Peking University this summer.

我今年夏天将要去北京大学上学。

They are going
to the park tomorrow.

他们明天要去公园。

Tips：

be going to也是一种表示将来时态的方法。

（2）图示。

Tips：

根据定义可见一般将来时发生在数轴上的斜线部分。因为在将来还没有发生，所以也就具有一定的预见性。

（3）结构。

在这个时态中，我们不采用图表的方式来学习，其主要结构是：

疑问句是将will或shall提前即可，否定在其后加not。

e.g.: Shall
I go to school tomorrow?

Yes, you shall
./ No, you shall not
.

Will
you go to America in 2009?

Yes, I will
./ No, I won't
.

（4）用法。

基本用法：

①表示说话人在将来某个时刻发生的动作或存在的状态。

e.g.: The sports meeting will be held
in 2018.

运动会将于2018年举行。

We will have a picnic this weekend.

我们这周末有个野餐会。

特殊用法：

②表示一般将来时，除了可以用will和shall的结构，还可以用以下几个结构，但要注意区别：

a. be going to do表示即将发生的事或打算、计划、决定或很有可能发生的事。

e.g.: I am going to have
a holiday next week.

我下个星期准备去度假。

We are going to spend
two months reading this book.

我们准备花两个月时间读这本书。

b. be about to do表示安排好了或筹备已久的事情。

e.g.: He is about to swim
across this channel next month.

他打算下个月横渡这个海峡。

Tips：

be about to这个结构一般还和when连用形成固定搭配。

e.g.: When it rained yesterday, I was about to go to the shopping mall.

昨天下雨的时候，我刚好要去购物中心。

特别要注意，一般在when的结构中使用过去将来时态时都用be about to do的结构。

c. be to do表示安排好，且是将来可能成为现实的事情。

e.g.: I am to be
a doctor in a few years.

过几年我就会成为医生。

President Xi is to visit
Russia in 2019.

习主席将于2019年访问俄罗斯。

5.2　过去将来时

（1）定义：表示说话的人在过去将来的某一时刻所发生的动作或存在的状态。

Tips：

过去将来时也是一种用来预测将来发生事情的时态，它要比一般将来时所表达的可能性要大一些，因为这是在过去的某个时刻说出的话，预示着将来所发生的事情。

e.g.: They said they would have a very important meeting next week.

他们说下周他们有个重要的会议。

Tips：

在从句中所用的时态就是过去将来时，因为是在过去预测将来所发生的事情。

e.g.: Could you help me?

你能帮我一下吗？

（2）图示。

Tips：

从图中可看出在过去某时之后的时间所发生的动作和状态都可叫做过去将来时。这个时态与现在和将来相连接，句子当中的时态既可以是现在发生，也可能是将来发生。所以也就导致过去将来时经常用于宾语从句当中。

（3）结构。

疑问句是将would或should提前即可，否定在其后加not。

e.g.: Should I go to school tomorrow?

Yes, you should./ No, you should not.

Would you go to America in 2009?

Yes, I would./ No, I would not.

（4）用法。

基本用法：

主要用于间接引语（宾语从句）中，详见第11章，主句谓语多用一般过去时。

e.g.: She said that she could go to college next year.

她说她明年要上大学了。

They hoped that they could defeat the enemies.

他们希望他们能打败敌人。

5.3　现在进行时

（1）定义：表示说话人即刻所发生的动作或存在的状态。

e.g.: Sherry is playing basketball.

谢丽正在打篮球。

Henry and Bruce are writing something.

亨利和布鲁斯正在写东西。

They are cooking the dinner.

他们正在做饭。

（2）图示。

Tips：

从图中可看出“即刻”是怎样表示出来的，表示是在中心点和其边缘所发生的动作和状态。所以现在进行时态所表示的动作发生的时间不仅仅可以表示正在发生的动作，也可以表示动作的某种持续性，即动作可以在一段时间内发生，我们在比较时态的过程中会讨论这个问题。

（3）结构。

be动词形式要根据人称和数的变化而变化。在这里我们要讨论一下现在分词的构成（见表5-1）。

表5-1　分词构成

情况

例词

一般动词直接在词尾加-ing，读/i
/。

look—looking

work—working

see—seeing

重读闭音节词的词尾双写词尾字母加-ing，读/i
/。

stop—stopping

plan—planning

有辅音字母接不发音e的结尾，去e加-ing，读/i
/。

use—using

live—living

leave—leaving

疑问句是将be提到句首既可，回答用yes或是no。

e.g.: He is playing basketball at this moment.

Is he playing basketball at this moment?

Yes, he is. / No, he is not.

（4）用法。

基本用法：

①表示说话的人正在发生的动作或存在的状态。它经常和now, at this moment, at the same time等词连用。

e.g.: She is having
a bath.

她正在洗澡。

Is she having
a bath?

她正在洗澡吗？

Yes, she is
./No, she isn't
.

是的，她是。/不，她不是。

What is
she doing
?

她正在干什么？

②表示说话的人在最近一段时间内正在发生的动作或存在的状态，经常和these days, these weeks等词连用。

e.g.: He is reading
this book these days.

这几天来他一直在读这本书。

They are trying
to look for this person these weeks.

几周来他们一直试图找到这个人。

特殊用法：

①用于表示将来发生的事，常表示“意图”、“安排”或“打算”的含义，特别表示最近或较近事情的发生，常用于位移动词中。

e.g.: The train is
leaving

at 7:45a.m.

火车早上7:45分出站。

He is going
for a holiday.

他打算去度假。

②always可以用于现在进行时态，用来表示说话的某种感谢色彩。

Tips：

这种用法在英语的各大考试中出现的频率甚高，请注意。

e.g.: She is always criticizing other people.

她总是喜欢批评别人。

在这里表示的含义就是对她的这种做法不是十分满意，含有抱怨的情绪在其中，所以表达了一种感情色彩。

The teacher is always laughing at his students.

老师总是嘲笑他的学生。

（5）比较。

①一般现在时可表示最近发生的事情：

e.g.: He reads
a book these days.

现在进行时也可表示最近发生的事情：

e.g.: He is reading
a book these days.

Tips：

现在进行时更强调动作的持续性，表示说话人最近几天都在进行此动作，而且连续不断，但是一般现在时表示可能在最近一段时间做此动作，并无持续性，可能是断断续续的。

②位移动词的代替用法

在位移动词的使用过程中，既可以用一般现在时态代替一般将来时态，也可以用现在进行时态代替一般将来时态，请看例句：

e.g.: The train is leaving at 3 o'clock.p.m.

The train leaves at 3 o'clock.p.m.

Tips：

leave是位移动词，所以我们要用以上两种时态代替一般将来时。但是前者更加强调动作发生的时间更加接近下午3点，现在可能是下午2:58分，后者则更加强调现在可能是1点或是中午12点。但是在没有任何语言环境的情况下，我们无法判断用什么时态，两者都可以。

5.4　过去进行时

（1）定义：表示说话人过去某个具体时间所发生的动作或存在的状态。

e.g.: He was having
breakfast at 7 o'clock yesterday morning.

他昨天早上七点正在吃饭。

What were
you doing
when I came back?

当我回来的时候你正在做什么？

While I was having
lunch, the door bell was ringing
.

当我正在吃饭的时候，门铃也在响。

Tips：

从以上几个句子不难看出，过去进行时都要和一定的时间状语连用。一般来说，不把过去进行时单独使用。在后面总结时态的时候，还会讲到关于有几个时态必须和时间状语连用的。

（2）图示。

Tips：

在图示中不难看出过去进行时表示的是过去某一具体时刻发生的事情，而和一般过去时所不同的在于：前者强调时间点发生的事，而后者强调时间段发生的事。这点实际上也是一般时态和进行时态的区别所在，一般的四个时态（一般过去时、一般现在时、一般将来时和过去将来时）都是在时间段内发生的动作或存在的状态，但是进行时态（现在进行时、过去进行时、将来进行时和过去将来进行时）都是在时间点上发生的动作或存在的状态，进行时态还是可以用于表示时间段，请注意这种用法。

（3）结构。

疑问句一般是把be动词提到句首，用yes或no来回答。

He was doing his homework.

Was he doing his homework?

Yes, he was. / No, he was not.

（4）用法。

①常和过去某一具体时间连用表示正在发生的动作和存在的状态。

e.g.: He was playing
football at 7 last night.

他昨晚七点正在踢球。

What was
the boy doing
when the thieves stole his clothes?

小偷在偷他衣服时他在干什么？

②常有文中出现“when + 过去进行时，一般过去时”的结构。

e.g.: What were
they doing
when the accident happened?

当事故发生时，他们正在干什么？

She was living
in Beijing when she was 8 years old.

当她8岁时，她正住在北京。

③主要用于间接引语（宾语从句）中，详见于第11章。

e.g.: I told you that she was leaving
soon.

我告诉你她不久就要走了。

He told me that he was having lunch at that time.

他说他那时正在吃饭。

5.5　将来进行时

（1）定义：表示说话的人在将来某个具体时间所发生的动作或存在的状态。

e.g.: They will be giving a speech tomorrow morning.

他们明天早上将举行一个讲座。

Tips：

将来进行时在表示将来所发生的动作和存在的状态中，相比较一般将来时来说，发生的可能性更大。

（2）图示。

Tips：

从图中不难看出，图上的黑点部分就是将来进行时态所发生的时间点，在将来某个确定的时间，所以发生的可能性是较大的。

（3）结构。

疑问句是将助动词will提到句首即可，回答用yes或是no。

She will be singing at this time of next week.

Will she be singing at this time of next week?

Yes, she will. / No, she will not./ No. she won't.

（4）用法。

基本用法：

表示说话的人在将来的某一个具体时刻发生的动作或存在的状态。

Henry will be going to the United States tomorrow to visit her girl friend.

亨利明天去美国看他的女朋友。

People will be waiting for the music band to give a performance in three days.

人们在三天后等待乐队的演出。

特殊用法：

表示说话人的某种委婉说法。

Will you be waiting for me?

Tips：

这个句子所表达的含义要比Will you wait for me？更委婉一些。委婉的原因很简单。例如Could you help me? 比Can you help me? 要委婉的原因就在于could是can的过去式，是表示已经发生过的事情，既然已经是发生过的事情，肯定是对说者和听者都很有礼貌，这样就产生了委婉语气。当大家在看将来进行时比一般将来时要委婉时，也就不言而喻了，因为将来进行时是将来正在发生的事情，而一般将来时则是在将来有可能发生的事情。

小结：
以上5种时态，包括昨天所讲的两种时态是英语中最基本的时态，也是最简单和最常用的时态。在不配任何习题的情况下，希望大家能回答下列的问题：

（1）一般现在时的基本用法是什么？“主将从现”指的是什么？位移动词的替代情况是如何的？

（2）一般过去时中used to和would do有什么样的区别？

（3）一般将来时的几个特殊表达法有什么不同？

（4）过去将来时一般用在什么从句当中？它所表达的将来的可能性比一般将来时大还是小？

（5）现在进行时是否可以表示一段时间内所发生的事情？它又和一般现在时表示一段时间内发生的事情有什么样的不同？

（6）过去进行时使用时一般有什么要求？

（7）将来进行时是如何表达委婉语气的？为什么可以这样表达？

在不配任何练习的情况下，希望大家能对以上的问题对答如流，这样在明天学习完时态之后，再去把后面的习题做完，就能把英语中所有的时态都弄懂了。努力吧！

第六天

突破英语的时态（二）

Tips：

本章讲解英语中最难的4个时态，要特别注意最后的时态总结，这是时态部分学习的精髓，而且还要对后面练习中经典的题目加以深入的分析，因为这些题目大都是高考和四、六级中的典型考题。

6.1　现在完成时

Tips：

完成时是英语中最重要的时态之一，请务必认真学习本节。在中文里我们一般表达完成时态时使用“已经”一词，但是在英语中却不是already就可以表示的，谓语部分必须有相应的变化，这样才可以形成正式的完成时态，而且完成时也是在表示过去发生的事情，但是和一般过去时态是完全不一样的。

（1）定义：（跨越两个时间段，一个在过去，另一个在现在，三层含义）

①说话人的动作发生在过去（和一般过去时态不一样）。

②而影响或持续到现在（重点在这里）。

③说话人的目的在于强调动作的影响和持续 （注意句子的意图是什么）。

e.g.: I have had supper for three hours.

我已经吃过晚饭三个小时了。

这句话并不是想强调我什么时候吃饭，或是吃的什么饭，甚至吃了几个小时，只是想强调吃完饭了这件事情对于现在的影响。

e.g.: She has been away here since 1976.

她1976年就已经离开这里了。

这名话表示她已经很多年不在这里了，和她什么时候走的并没有什么关系。

The cat has been dead for two days.

这只猫已经死了两天了。

（2）图示。

Tips：

这张图和我们以前所看到的图示都是不一样的，因为涉及两个时间，从图中可以看出说话的人的动作发生在过去某个时刻，而它的影响和持续却至今，我们并不想了解动作发生在哪个时间，而是更多地了解动作如何影响或持续至今。

（3）结构。

在这里我们必须讨论过去分词的构成。

表6-1　过去分词的构成

情况

例词

在词尾直接加-ed

look—looked

work—worked

walk—walked

以不发音的e结尾直接加-d

love—loved

live—lived

hope—hoped

辅音字母+y结尾变y为i加-ed

supply—supplied

try—tried

carry—carried

重读闭音节的词尾双写词尾字母加-ed

stop—stopped

plan—planned

不规则动词

see—seen

fly—flown

forget—forgotten

（4）用法。

①表示说话的人的过去的动作对于现在的影响。

e.g.: I have typed
this letter.

我已经把这封信打好了。（表示动作“打字”发生在过去，而我们要知道的是“字打完后”就有时间了，强调影响。）

He has gone
there.

他已经去那儿了。（表示动作“走了”发生在过去，而我们要知道的是他不在这儿，不关心他什么时间走或到哪儿去了。）

②在英语中只有持续性动词（动作可以持续的动词，e.g.: live, study, read, finish等）才可用于现在完成时, 而非持续性动词（动作不可以持续的动词, e.g.: get up, dead, buy, sell, come, go等）不可用于现在完成时。

e.g.: He has been dead
for three years.

他已经死了三年了。

切不可说：He has died
for three years.

Tips：

die是非持续性动词，“死”不可能“死”三年，所以这里要用它的形容词形式来代替。这样的情况还可以用于以下的动词：

buy—kept

go—be away

come—be here

join in—be a member of

像以上这样的结构还有许多，需要大家平时多收集和认真记忆。

e.g.: He has joined in the army for three years.

由于join in是一个不及物动词，所以我们应该写成以下的句子：

He has been a member of the army for three years.

他参军已经三年了。

③现在完成时常和时间段连用，常见的又以since和for两个词引导时间状语。

e.g.: He has been here
since 1999.

他从1999年起就在这儿了。（since表示“从……开始”，它是表示时间段的词。）

He has been here
for 4 years.

他已在这儿住四年了。（“for+时间段”表示一段时间。）

④现在完成时中常用的副词有already（“已经”，用于肯定句），yet（“还”用于否定和疑问句），just（“刚刚”）。

e.g.: She has already finished
this subject.

她已经完成了这个课题。

The girl hasn't had
a meal yet today.

小女孩今天还没有吃饭。

Lucy has just been away
.

露西刚刚才走。

⑤现在完成时用于表示说话的人过去的动作持续至今。

e.g.: The Chinese people have used
bamboos to make paper for several thousand years.

中国人已经用竹子造纸几千年了。（表示中国人几千年一直用竹子造纸，而且很可能现在和将来还要用竹子造纸。）

（5）比较。

①一般过去时和现在完成时的比较。

a. My father had
lunch at 6 p.m.

我爸晚上六点吃饭。

b. My father has had
lunch for three hours.

我爸已经吃过饭三个小时了。

a.表示“我爸在晚上六点吃饭”这个动作的发生，它和现在没有关系，只是一个人发生一个动作。

b.表示“我爸已经吃过饭三个小时了”，它不强调动作的发生，而是强调动作对于现在的影响，可能我爸现在不想吃东西或不饿等。

②has been to和has gone to的区别。

a. I have been to
Shanghai.

我去过上海。

b. I have gone to
Shanghai.

我去了上海。

a. 和b. 的区别在于前者表示曾经去过，而现在说话人在现场，后者则表示已经去了某地，现在不在此地。

Tips：

现在完成时是英语中最重要的时态，在本章中并没有分成基本用法和特殊用法，因为这些用法一定要完全记住，用法的比较也十分重要。后面要讲解的过去完成时和将来完成时都是在现在完成时的基础上延伸出来的。

6.2　过去完成时

（1）定义：简而言之就是“过去的过去”。表示说话的人在过去的过去所发生的动作对于过去的影响。一般要用于具体的时间状语中，不单独使用。

e.g.: He said he had walked
for several days.

他说他已经走了几天了。

By the time of last summer the edifice had been built
for five years.

到去年年底这栋摩天大楼已经建成5年了。

Before 7 o'clock they hadn't reached
the railway station.

七点之前他们还没有到火车站。

（2）图示。

Tips：

在图示中，过去的过去所发生的动作对于过去产生了影响，实际上也就是相当于现在完成时向后倒退了一个时间段，所以它被形象地称为“过去的过去”。

（3）结构。

（4）用法。

基本用法：

①用于表示“过去的过去”。

e.g.: Before she went to bed Lily had dealt
with everything that she need do.

在丽莉睡觉之前她处理好了一切她需要做的事。

At the age of five, he had played
piano very well.

在他五岁时他钢琴弹得已经很好了。

②用于when引导的时间状语后和用于含有by引导的时间状语从句之后。

e.g.: When I was a child, I had had
to live alone.

当我还是个孩子时我就不得不一个人住。

By the time of 1996, Bruce had collected
more than six thousand stamps in all.

到1996年布鲁斯已经总共收集到了超过六千张的邮票。

③用于间接引语（宾语从句）中，详见于第十一天的内容。

e.g.: I said I had repaired
the desk.

我说我已经修好了坏的桌子。

Ann told you that she had told
her father something important about you.

安说她已经把一些重要的关于你的事情告诉了他的父亲。

6.3　将来完成时

（1）定义：说话的人在现在乃至将来发生的事情对将来产生的影响。

e.g.: By 2018, they will have learned about 6000 thousand words.

到2018年，他们将会学习6000个单词了。

这句话的含义在于强调到2018年时的影响，而不是强调在将来能学习多少单词或是别的动作或状态。

（2）图示。

Tips：

从上图中不难看出，现在甚至将来发生的事情对将来产生了某种影响，这样的时态称为将来完成时。

（3）结构。

疑问句是将will提到句首，回答时用yes或no来回答。

He will have finished this task by 2014.

Will he have finished this task by 2014?

Yes, he will. / No, he will not.

（4）用法。

基本用法：
表示将来一定会发生的某件事情。

Tips：

在前面刚讲解一般将来时曾经讨论过将来时发生的可能性，在所有表示将来时的语法现象中，将来完成时是在表达上最有可能发生的。

e.g.: When he becomes an adult, he will have been a doctor.

他长大以后很有成为一个医生。

这句话实际上比 When he becomes an adult, he will be a doctor.所发生的可能性要大得多。

6.4　现在完成进行时

（1）定义：表示说话从过去发生一个动作持续到现在，并有可能持续下去。强调动作的持续性和影响性。

e.g.: He has been waiting for you for three hours.

他已经等你等了三个小时了。

Tips：

这句话所表达的意思是说话的人已经等了三个小时，在过去的三个小时里动作是持续性的，而且这个动作还可能持续。从这里可以看出，完成进行时是一组比较特殊的时态，我们在这里只讨论常用的现在完成进行时。

（2）图示。

Tips：

在图示中可以看出，现在完成进行时是在过去持续发生的事情，和完成时不一样的地方在于，完成时是一定对现在或是将来有影响，但是完成进行时态不只会有影响，更多的是考虑到会不会持续的问题。在这里不讨论到底能不能持续的问题，因为这是一个深层的英语语法问题，我们假设都可以持续。

（3）结构。

疑问句是将have提到句首，回答时用yes或no来回答。

He has been painting this picture for several days.

Has he been painting this picture for several days?

Yes, he has. / No, he has not.

（4）用法。

基本用法：
表示过去发生的动作对现在产生的影响，并将持续下去。

e.g.: This girl has been living abroad for many years.

这个女孩已经在国外呆了多年了。

特殊用法：
表示一种委婉语气。

e.g.: Too many things have been happening this fall.

真是个多事之秋啊！

小结：
时态实际上要表述时间和状态，不论什么时态，在句子中的体现都是先是时间，后是状态，比方说：

现在进行时　am/is/are doing

过去进行时　was/were doing

将来进行时　will be doing

大家会发现前面的助动词、时间在变化，后面的状态始终都是doing，没有任何变化。再看下面一组：

现在完成时　have/has done

过去完成时　had done

将来完成时　will have done

大家同时也会发现前面的助动词、时间在变化，后面的状态始终都是done，没有任何变化。所以，时态的核心就在于时间和状态的搭配，大家如果能够站在这样的高度看待时态的话，那么回答下面这样一些问题应该是可以的：

（1）现在完成时要用什么样的时间状语？

（2）现在完成时可不可以用非持续性动词？

（3）过去完成时一般和什么样的时间状语连用？

（4）现在完成时表示将来的可能性比一般将来时大还是小？

（5）现在完成进行时表示持续的影响吗？

在完成了以上的问题和以下的习题之后，相信大家一定能够突破英语的时态了。努力！

练习

1. By the end of this year, I _____ English in that middle school for three years.

A. have taught

B. will be teaching

C. will have taught

D. are teaching

2. — What happened to Tony?

— He stepped on a nail while he _____ in the yard.

A. was running

B. is running

C. runs

D. had run

3. We promise that we'll meet again after we _____ our college education in three years time.

A. finish

B. will finish

C. have gone

D. goes

4. She often _____ to see her grandparents.

A. is going

B. went

C. has gone

D. goes

5. It is the first time I _____ the Great Wall.

A. will visit

B. had visited

C. have visited

D. visit

6. It was the first time I _____ the Great Wall.

A. will visit

B. had visited

C. have visited

D. visit

7. She _____ in two hours.

A. arrives

B. will arrive

C. is arriving

D. is to arrive

8. I'll give him this message the moment I _____ him.

A. will see

B. see

C. is seeing

D. is to see

9. As soon as I _____ New York, I'll write to you.

A. am getting to

B. get to

C. will get to

D. get

10. If it _____ rain tomorrow, we will have a picnic.

A. won't

B. doesn't

C. will

D. wouldn't

11. John's brother _____ in bed all day because he had a headache.

A. lay

B. lie

C. laid

D. lain

12. — What were you doing this time last night?

— I _____ newspaper.

A. am reading

B. was reading

C. read

D. would read

13. I _____ my homework when the telephone _____.

A. did; rang

B. was doing; was ringing

C. was doing; rang

D. did; was ringing

14. Do you see the sign that _____ “keep off the grass”?

A. is read

B. reads

C. is written

D. writes

15. Can you tell me when you _____?

A. come back

B. will come back

C. is coming back

D. would come back

16. When spring _____, the weather will be warmer and warmer.

A. is coming

B. comes

C. come

D. will come

17. — Do you know him?

— Yes, I _____ once before.

A. met

B. meet

C. have met

D. had met

18. Look out! The car _____.

A. comes

B. is coming

C. will come

D. is to come

19. You must water these flowers. Look, they _____ soon.

A. will die

B. would die

C. are dying

D. are being died

20. Hello! I _____ you _____ in London. How long have you been here?

A. don't know; were

B. hadn't known; are

C. haven't known; are

D. didn't know; were

21. Don't get off the bus until it _____.

A. has stopped

B. stopped

C. will stop

D. shall stop

22. That supper was the most delicious dinner I _____.

A. would have

B. have ever had

C. had never had

D. had ever had

23. Let's set off before the sun _____.

A. will set

B. is setting

C. sets

D. set

24. — What will you do this weekend?

— I don't know, but it's about time _____ it.

A. I'm considering

B. I'll consider

C. I had considered

D. I considered

25. — Dick sat in the back of the classroom. — Really? I thought he _____ in the front.

A. sat

B. is sitting

C. has been sitting

D. had sat

26. The last time I _____ her, she _____ at a medical college.

A. was visiting; studied

B. visited; studies

C. visited; was studying

D. was visiting; was studying

27. — _____ my pen?

— Yes, I saw it on the desk a moment ago.

A. Do you see

B. Had you seen

C. Would you see

D. Have you seen

28. You can't watch TV until you _____ your homework.

A. did

B. are doing

C. have done

D. had done

29. My wish is _____ a teacher.

A. becoming

B. become

C. to become

D. being come

30. — Hi, Tracy, you look tired.

— I'm tired, because I _____ the living room all day.

A. painted

B. had painted

C. have been painting

D. have painted

31. He insists that he _____ it by himself.

A. manages

B. will manage

C. manage

D. managed

32. You _____ upset, what's wrong with you?

A. are looking

B. have looked

C. look

D. looked

33. — He _____ here five days ago. — What _____ these days?

A. came; did he do

B. came; was he doing

C. came; has he been doing

D. has come; has he been doing

34. I phoned him that I _____ there next week.

A. was going to

B. was going to be

C. will get

D. would get to

35. You can't catch up with your classmates unless you _____ hard.

A. work

B. are to work

C. will work

D. is going to work

36. He suddenly remembered that he _____ his key at home.

A. had forgotten

B. has left

C. had left

D. has forgotten

37. The temple _____ for years.

A. isn't repaired

B. hasn't repaired

C. hasn't been repaired

D. hadn't repaired

38. He _____ while he _____ his motorbike and hurt his leg.

A. had fallen; rode

B. fall; was riding

C. fell; was riding

D. had fallen; was riding

39. You should prepare the dinner before guests _____.

A. will be arrived

B. are arrived

C. arrive

D. will arrive

40. It _____ two years _____ I had been here.

A. is; that

B. was; that

C. is; since

D. was; since

41. It _____ two years since I _____ here.

A. is; has been away

B. is; had left

C. was; have left

D. was; would leave

42. I don't know if she _____. If she _____, I'll let you know.

A. will come; comes

B. comes; will comes

C. comes; comes

D. will come; will come

43. My birthday _____ next week I _____ twenty-three years old.

A. comes; is to be

B. is coming; will be

C. comes; shall be

D. is coming; is going to be

44. Who do you think _____ him advice?

A. give

B. gives

C. giving

D. to give

45. — Which big city have you visited?

— I _____ New York.

A. have gone to

B. have been to

C. went to

D. go to

46. He_____ to New York three times last year.

A. has been

B. has gone

C. went

D. was going

47. He _____ for his ID Card, which he _____ for several days.

A. has looked; has lost

B. has been looking; has lost

C. has looked; has missed

D. has been looking; has missed

48. Some experts think these plays _____ written by Shakespeare.

A. were not

B. has not been

C. is not to be

D. had not been

49. Nancy _____ “Hello” to people who she meets.

A. is always saying

B. was always saying

C. always gave

D. would give

50. As she _____ the newspaper, Granny _____ asleep.

A. read; was falling

B. was reading; fell

C. was reading; was falling

D. read; fell

51. Tom _____ into the house when no one _____.

A. slipped; was looking after him

B. had slipped; looked after him

C. slipped; had looked after him

D. was slipping; looked after him

52. You are still here, and I _____ you _____ America.

A. think; are leaving

B. think; have already left for

C. thought; had already left for

D. thought; would leave for

53. A new cinema _____ here. They hope to finish it next week.

A. will be built

B. is built

C. has been built

D. is being built

54. Look at the bad weather. It _____ heavily for two days.

A. is raining

B. had rained

C. has been raining

D. has been rained

55. _____ there likely _____ anyone to meet us at the airport?

A. Does; to be

B. Is; being

C. Has; that

D. Is; to be

56. — It's said that “Titanic” is a moving film.

— I _____ it yet. I hope to see it soon.

A. didn't see

B. hadn't seen

C. don't see

D. haven't seen

57. I had a discussion with Mr. Blake and hoped he _____ us an early reply.

A. would give

B. give

C. gave

D. had given

58. He told me how to do after I _____ him twice.

A. ask

B. have asked

C. asked

D. had asked

59. John said that he would write to me but I _____ him so far.

A. didn't hear from

B. hadn't heard from

C. haven't heard from

D. hadn't received

60. By the time I arrive at the station, the train _____.

A. will start

B. starts

C. will have started

D. is starting

61. — There are many people in the square. — What do you suppose _____?

A. is happened

B. did happen

C. would happen

D. has happened

62. — Hey, Henry! Where are you going?

— Oh, I'm terrible sorry, _____.

A. I'm not noticing

B. I wasn't noticing

C. I haven't noticed

D. I don't noticing

63. Look! What _____ they _____ over there?

A. did; do

B. do; do

C. are; doing

D. will do

64. — Professor Zhang has just arrived.

— Really? I don't think he _____ until next month.

A. is coming

B. has come

C. will come

D. had come

65. Doctor Joan _____ in the hospital since she _____ from a university.

A. has worked; graduated

B. had worked; graduated

C. was working; graduated

D. worked; graduated

66. — Do you know anyone in Paris?

— No, but I'll make friends once _____.

A. I’ve been settled

B. I'll be settled

C. I had settled

D. I'm settled

67. — Have you brought me a dictionary?

— Oh, sorry. I _____ all about it.

A. forget

B. had forgotten

C. forgot

D. will forget

68. — Is Mary in?

— She is out, and _____ back until eight o'clock.

A. she comes

B. she'll come

C. she won't come

D. she'll be

69. Henry visited his old friends a week before he _____ Canada.

A. had left for

B. would leave for

C. left for

D. has left for

70. Health experts in many countries still _____ their ideas about the relationship between food and health.

A. have tested

B. tested

C. are testing

D. test

71. The old said the earth _____ round the sun.

A. moves

B. will move

C. is moving

D. is to move

72. It is 8 o'clock now. The plane _____ in half an hour.

A. will leave

B. is leaving

C. leaves

D. is to leave

73. Unless you _____ smoking, you'll not be healthy.

A. give up

B. will give up

C. gave up

D. will give in

74. — Where is John?

— Oh, he _____ just now.

A. goes out

B. has gone to

C. went out

D. had gone to

75. It has been five years since he _____ smoking.

A. gives up

B. gave up

C. has given up

D. would give up

76. I _____ swim in the river when I was a child.

A. went

B. used to

C. am used to

D. was used to

77. He was recovered sooner than I _____.

A. am expected

B. am expecting

C. expected

D. have expected

78. We were all surprised when he made it clear that he _____ office soon.

A. leaves

B. would leave

C. left

D. had left

79. — We could have walked to the station; it was not very far.

— Yes. A taxi _____ at the all necessary.

A. wasn't

B. hadn't been

C. wouldn't be

D. won't be

80. He _____ the guitar when I went to see him last night.

A. has been plying

B. had played

C. was playing

D. played

81. My father said that he _____ the car for ten years.

A. has bought

B. had bought

C. has had

D. had had

82. Can you tell me what _____ next?

A. will we do

B. we will do

C. we would do

D. would we do

83. — Did you see Mary in reading room?

— No, _____ by the time I came in.

A. she'd left

B. she's left

C. she left

D. she would leave

84. To our surprise, we found that she _____ her English so rapidly.

A. improves

B. improved

C. has improved

D. had improved

85. Did you ask Nancy if she _____ tomorrow?

A. left

B. had left

C. is going to leave

D. was going to leave

86. David _____ to pass the examination but he failed.

A. has hoped

B. hopes

C. would hope

D. had hoped

87. She told me that she _____ there in two hours.

A. will be

B. would be

C. was

D. has been

88. There _____ great changes in our hometown in the past twenty years.

A. had been

B. will be

C. have been

D. were

89. I'll begin the dictation when you _____ ready.

A. shall be

B. will be

C. are

D. have been

90. It _____ when we arrived at the station.

A. has snowed

B. is snowing

C. snowed

D. was snowing

91. — When will you finish your work?

— I'll finish it before you _____ back.

A. come

B. will come

C. shall come

D. have come

92. — Why do you hurt her?

— But, I _____.

A. mean to

B. didn't mean to

C. meant to

D. would mean to

93. — Please help me post this letter.

— OK, _____.

A. I do

B. I would

C. I will

D. I did

94. I never imagined that Peter _____ such a good student.

A. be

B. would be

C. is

D. will have been

95. Human beings _____ the moon and _____ to the earth again.

A. have gone to; came back

B. have gone to; came back

C. have been; came back

D. have been to; came back

96. By the end of last year I _____ ten thousand English words.

A. have learnt

B. had learnt

C. would have learn

D. will learn

97. Hardly _____ the house when it began to rain.

A. I had left

B. had I left

C. I have left

D. have I left

98. I _____ to say my opinion, but the meeting was over.

A. have hoped

B. was hoping

C. had hoped

D. would hope

99. We _____ a walk when it started to rain.

A. take

B. took

C. are taking

D. were taking

100. By the time I get to the airport, the plane _____ for Shanghai.

A. will leave

B. leaves

C. will have left

D. left

101. Not until I returned home _____ that my wallet _____.

A. I found; was stolen

B. had found; had stolen

C. did I found; had been stolen

D. had I found; has been stolen

102. There _____ a storm in this area next week.

A. is

B. will be

C. is to be

D. is going to be

103. I _____ him for a relative. Why didn't you tell me earlier?

A. have taken

B. took

C. take

D. had taken

104. In the past ten years I _____ all mountains in China.

A. have traveled

B. traveled

C. had traveled

D. was traveling

第七天

突破英语的被动语态和助动词以及情态动词

Tips：

被动语态是一个典型的结构性语法的教学典范，只需要掌握本章中所讲的几大结构，然后把所学的知识放在其中就可以了。助动词和情态动词一直是难点，本章中罗列了主要助动词的用法，在学习情态动词的过程中可采取对比的办法。

7.1　被动语态

1. 语态

语态是英语中一个语法范畴。它主要表示主语和谓语之间的关系。英语中的语态可以分为两类，即主动语态和被动语态。

e.g.:

2. 被动语态

（1）定义：被动语态即是受动者处于主语位置上，而谓语位置上由be+过去分词构成的一种语态。

e.g.: I was invited
to your birthday party.

我被邀请参加你的生日晚会。

Henry has been wanted
on the telephone several times.

亨利已经有几个电话找亨利了。

（2）构成。

被动语态是由“be+过去分词”构成的。

e.g.: The classroom is being cleaned
by us.

教室正在被我们打扫。

The project has already been finished
.

这项工程已经完成了。

They were killed in the accident.

他们在这场事故中丧身了。

（3）主动语态变被动语态的方法。

主动语态变被动语态要遵循以下的规律：“主（语）变宾（语），宾（语）变主（语），动词变‘be + done’，其余部分带下来。”

*done代表各种动词的过去分词。

e.g.:

（主语I变成by I (me)形式，宾语a box变成主语放在句首，动词am carrying变成is being carried形式，而其他部分into the room带到下句，一般可将by结构省略。）

Tips：

在这里用一种数学办法让大家感受主动语态变成被动语态的方法。

e.g.: I am washing my coat now.

其实谓语动词的变化最重要，我们看看方法：

这就一目了然了，句子中同时出现时态和语态时，必然先是时态，再是语态，两者相加，即得出一个完整的谓语动词。再如下一句：

He has finished this task for three days.

谓语动词的变化如下：

所以这句话变出结果是：This task has been finished by him for three days.

（4）几种特殊句型的被动语态。

①含有双宾语的被动语态。

e.g.: I
（主语）
gave
（动词）
him
（间接宾语）
a pen
（直接宾语）
.

本句有两种变法，既可以将间接宾语变成主语，也可以把直接宾语变成主语。

You were given
a pen. / A pen was given
to you.

Tips：

将直接宾语变成主语，要用to来连接动词和间接宾语（宾格形式），切不可省略。

②含有复合宾语的被动语态。

e.g.: We
（主语）
elected
（动词）
him
（宾语）
our president
（宾语补足语）
.

按照变化规律本句应变化为：

He was elected
our president by us.

但是有些情况（如下），要用to来连接宾语补足语和动词。

Tips：

在本句中make是使役动词（包括感观动词），它后接不加to的不定式做宾语补足语，变成被动语态时要将to还原，不可省略。

③含有情态动词的被动语态。

e.g.: He need look after his mother in the hospital.

按照变化规律本句应变化为：

His mother need be looked after
in the hospital.

含有情态动词的句子变被动语态的规律是：情态动词+be+动词原形。

④含有动词词组的被动语态。

e.g.: He looked at the picture.

按照变化规律本句应变化为：

The picture was looked at
by him.

Tips：

在过去式looked后，切记不要忘记at这个介词，因为look at是完整动词词组。

⑤含有宾语从句的被动语态。

e.g.: I think that she is a nurse.

如果按照变化规律变化本句的话，宾语是一个句子，而不是词。这时可以有以下两种变化方法：

a. 将宾语从句中的主语看作宾语而进行变化，即：

She is thought
to be a nurse by me.

Tips：

其实这也就是英语当中be done to do的结构。

b. 将宾语从句用it这个形式主语来代替而进行变化，即：

It is thought
that she is a nurse by me.

Tips：

实际上这也就是英语中主语从句的形成方式，比方说我们有：

It is reported/thought/said/guessed/believed that ...

We said that he had been rich. 此句有两种变化方法：

（5）几种含有被动意义的主动语态的句型。

①含有某些联系动词的句子。

e.g.: The cloth feels soft.

这块布摸起来很柔软。（实际上“布”是被“摸”的。）

The songs hear very beautiful.

这些歌曲听起来很优美。（实际上“歌曲”是被“听”的。）

②某些可和well, easily等副词连用的不及物动词，如：read, sell, wash, draw, cook等。

e.g.: The book sold well.

这本书很畅销。（实际上“书”是被“卖”的。）

The shoes wore out several days.

这双鞋穿坏几天了。（实际上“鞋”是被“穿坏”的。）

（6）系表结构和被动语态的区别。

系表结构是be动词+表语（可以是过去分词构成的形容词）；被动语态是be动词+动词过去分词。

e.g.: The door is closed
.

如果说这句话是系表结构，它的意思是“门关着”；而如果说这句话是被动语态，它的意思是“门被关上”，最好区别它们的方法是根据具体情况和上下文的语境。

7.2　助动词和情态动词

1. 助动词

助动词是帮助实义动词形成时态，语态和语气的一类动词。它本身无意义，要与动词的各种形式结合，才有完整意义。

常见的助动词有：be动词，do动词，have动词，shall（should），will（would）等。

（1）be 动词

①be动词的一般式和现在分词构成现在进行时态。

e.g.: We are
climbing the mountain.

我们正在爬山。

They are
doing their homework.

他们正在做家庭作业。

②be动词的过去式和现在分词构成过去进行时态。

e.g.: The river was
being polluted by the factories.

这条河正在被工厂污染。

They were
sleeping when it began to rain.

当开始下雨时，他们正在睡觉。

③be动词和过去分词构成被动语态。

e.g.: The room has
never been entered by anyone.

这间房从未有人进去过。

We were
always bothered by these people.

我们总是被这些人打扰。

（2）have动词

Tips：

have动词的用法极其广泛，在这里把所有的用法都罗列一下。

①have可以是实意动词，表示“拥有”、“举行”等含义。

e.g.: I have a beautiful box.

我有个很漂亮的盒子。

We will have our sports meeting this afternoon.

我们今天下午举行体育运动会。

②have动词和动词过去分词构成现在完成时和过去完成时以及将来完成时。

e.g.: We have
already passed this exam.

我们已经通过这次考试。

He said he had
had to go to work.

他说他不得不去工作。

By 2019, our factory will have produced more missiles.

2019年，我们厂将生产更多的导弹。

③have动词还可以形成三个经典的短语。

a. have something done 使某事情被做

e.g.: I have my hair cut three days ago.

我三天前把头发剪了。

在这里表示被动语态，头发不能自己剪而是要被剪。

b. have somebody do 让某人做某事

e.g.: I have you wait for me now.

我正让他等我。

在这里have是使役动词的用法。

c. have somebody doing 使某人保持某种状态

e.g.: I have her waiting for me for a long time.

我让她一直等了很久。

（3）shall（should）和will（would）

shall（should）和will（would）和动词原形构成一般将来时和过去将来时。

e.g.: Bruce will
attend a meeting in Shanghai next year.

布鲁斯明年将要参加在上海的一个重要会议。

We shall
deal with this affair.

我们将处理好这件事。

I said I should
go to school first.

我说我要先去上学。

Tom said he would
listen to the music.

汤姆说他要听音乐。

（4）do动词

①do动词的各种形式构成各种疑问句。

e.g.: Do
you want to go home?

你想回家吗？

Did
they really spend this money?

他们真花了这些钱吗？

What did
she do?

她是干什么的？

②do动词构成各种否定句。

e.g.: He doesn't
work hard.

他工作不努力。

She didn't
like shopping.

她不喜欢购物。

③do动词构成强调句型。

e.g.: I do
love you forever.

我会爱你到永远。

Do
sit down!

请坐下！

2. 情态动词

情态动词是用来表达说话的人的意愿、能力、愿望、请求、义务等语气的一类动词。它本身无完整的意义，只有加上动词原形（除ought和have加不定式外）后才构成完整的谓语形式。在这一节中我们用比较的方法来讲述。

（1）can，could和be able to的用法。

①can的用法

a.表示某种能力。

e.g.: A bird can
fly.

鸟会飞。

b.表示允许。

e.g.: You can
go now.

你现在可以走了。

Can
I borrow your pen?

我能借你的钢笔吗？

c.表示请求、命令等。

e.g.: Can
I help you?

我能帮你什么？

Could
you help me?

你能帮我吗？

②could的用法

could实际上是can的过去式，也可以说是can的委婉说法。

a.用于过去时态中，特别是间接引语中可以表示can的过去式。

e.g.: She said she could
finish this job in a short time.

她说她一会儿就能把这工作做完了。

My sister told me that she could once
eat five apples.

我的姐姐告诉我她能一口气能吃五个苹果。

b.表示can的委婉说法。

e.g.: Could
you help me?

你是否能帮我一下？

Could
you lend me a pen?

你能借我一支钢笔吗？

③be able to的用法：用于表示“能够”。

e.g.: He is able to
pass CET-6.

他会通过英语六级考试的。

Tips：

be able to和can的区别在于，前者有更多的时态变化，而后者没有。

e.g.: When he was 6 years old, he was able to swim very well.

他六岁的时候能游泳游得很好了。

（2）may和might的用法。

①may的用法

a.用于表示可能。

e.g.: It may
be cloudy tomorrow.

明天可能多云。

What he said may
be true.

他说的可能是真的。

b.用于表示允许。

e.g.: You may
go now.

你现在可以走了。

May
I use your rubber?

我可用你的橡皮吗？

②might的用法

might是may的过去式，也可以说是may的委婉说法。

a.用于表示may的过去式，用于过去将来时。

e.g.: She said he might
telephone her at once.

她说他马上给她打电话。

His mother said she might
go to the school to see the teacher.

她妈妈说她去学校见老师了。

b.用于疑问句中表示委婉说法。

e.g.: Might
I use your rubber?

我可以用你的橡皮吗？

Might
she go with us?

她可以和我们一起吗？

（3）must和have to的用法。

must和have to都表示“必须”，而前者多表示主观，且动词形式较少；而后者表示客观，动词形式较多。

①must的用法

a.表示必然性。

e.g.: He must
be a worker.

他是个工人。

We must
make contributions to our society.

我必须为我们的社会作出贡献。

b.表示义务或强制。

e.g.: You must
catch the robbers.

你们必须抓住歹徒。

He must
remember to write home.

他要记住写信回家。

c. must用于疑问句时问答如下。

e.g.: Must
I go now?

我必须走吗？

Yes, you must
.

是的，你必须走。

No, you don't have to
. (No, you needn't
.)

不，你不必要走。

Tips：

在这里一定要注意否定形式的回答。

②have to的用法

a. have to可用于各种时态、语态中，形式较多。

e.g.: You can not imagine that they will have to
do so much work.

你难以想象他们将不得不做这么多工作。

Due to SARS people here had to
go out seldom.

由于“非典”这儿的人不得不少外出。

b.表示客观需要，而非主观愿望。

e.g.: It is too late, and we have to
go home now.

太晚了，我们必须要回家了。

（4）should和ought to的用法。

should和ought to都表示有义务做某事，而前者加动词原形，后者加不定式，它们都不及must 那样具有信心。

e.g.: We should
understand the fact that we should
work hard to our country.

我们必须明白我们必须为祖国努力工作。

You ought to
tell the truth to your mother.

你要把真相告诉你妈妈。

They ought to
run so quickly.

他们不得不快跑。

（5）shall和should的用法。

①shall的用法：用于第一人称表示意愿。

e.g.: I shall
leave Shanghai for Tokyo.

我要从上海到东京。

We shall
do this job for 5 years.

我们做这项工作要5年时间。

②should的用法。

a.用于表示shall的过去式，用于过去将来时。

e.g.: We said we should
go to Taiwan to have a visit.

我们说准备去台湾旅游。

b. 也可表示“有义务做某事”。（见上一条）

（6）will和would的用法。

①will的用法。

a.用于各种人称，表示意愿、意图。

e.g.: He will
attend a very important meeting in Hangzhou.

他将要在杭州参加一个很重要的会议。

Xiaoli will
take photo of you.

小李要给你照相。

b.用于“Will you please ...?”表示请求。

e. g.: Will you please
pass me the paper?

请你把纸递给我好吗？

Will you please
open the window?

请你打开窗好吗？

②would的用法。

a.用于will的过去形式，常用于过去将来时。

e.g.: They exclaimed that they would
give a lesson to U.S.

他们宣称将要教训一下美国。

She often said she would go abroad when she studied at college.

当她上大学时候她经常说她要去国外。

b.用于表示过去常常做某事，见“一般过去时”中的说明部分。

（7）dare和need的用法。

①dare表示“敢”，（作为情态动词时）后接动词原形，（作为实义动词时）后也可接不定式。

e.g.: She dare
go alone in the evening.

她敢晚上单独行走。

She dares
to go alone in the evening.

她敢晚上单独行走。

Tips：

他们的肯定句无区别，但下面的否定句和疑问句则有区别。

②need和dare的用法完全一致，（作为情态动词时）后接动词原形，（作为实义动词时）后也可接不定式，只是need表示“需要”。

Tips：

因为在任何一个考试中，不可能考这两个单词的肯定句，那么否定句和疑问句只要记住“有to有do，无to无do”的用法就可以了。

（8）“情态动词+现在完成体”的用法。

在英语中，我们可以用“情态动词+现在完成体”表示对过去情况的推测。这包括以下几种情况：

“must have+过去分词”表示对过去情况的肯定推测。

“should have+过去分词”表示过去有义务做某事而未做。

“ought to have+过去分词”表示过去有义务做某事而未做。

“need have+过去分词”表示过去有必要做某事而未做。

“may (might) have+过去分词”表示过去有可能做某事而未做。

“could have+过去分词”表示过去有能力做某事而未做。

e.g.: He must have passed
the exam.

他肯定通过了考试。（表示对过去情况的肯定。）

She should have finished
the housework.

她应该做完了家务。（表示她有义务做家务事，而她未做，一种委婉的批评。）

You need not have carried
so heavy box.

你没必要搬这么重的箱子。（表示本不必要搬这么重的箱子而搬了。）

He might have done
it very well.

他本来可以做得很好的。（表示他本可以做得好，而未做，表示一种委婉的批评。）

The sports meeting could have been
held yesterday.

运动会可能昨天举行过了。（表示过去有可能举行的运动会。）

小结：
在今天的学习中，我们接触了被动语态，在这一小节当中，主要掌握一个口诀和五种特殊的变化方法，在助动词中主要掌握be，have和do动词的主要用法，在情态动词中主要掌握两点：一是各个情态动词的比较，还有一个是情态动词+现在完成体的用法。那么来回答以下的几个问题：

（1）主动语态变被动语态的口诀是什么？

（2）被动语态中五种特殊的变化方法是什么？

（3）助动词中be，have和do分别怎么用？

（4）七组情态动词如何比较？

（5）“情态动词+现在完成体”表示什么？

如果大家对以上的问题都可以做到心中有数，那么今天的任务就算完成了。

被动语态练习

1. The young man has _____ fit for this job.

A. been proved

B. proved to be

C. been proved to be

D. proved being

2. Satellites are made _____ by scientists.

A. go into space

B. to go into space

C. go into the space

D. to go into the space

3. I was told _____ my study.

A. to continue

B. continuing

C. that continues

D. go on with

4. The dish _____ delicious.

A. is tasted

B. tastes

C. taste

D. are tasted

5. The workers _____ their rights.

A. deprived

B. deprived of

C. were deprived

D. were deprived of

6. This is one of the best books _____ by O. Henry.

A. that have ever been written

B. that have written

C. that had been written

D. that was written

7. — What about your new house?

— It is _____ now.

A. painted

B. being painted

C. to be painted

D. to have painted

8. — Come here. Where is your baby?

— My baby _____ by his aunt.

A. is taken care

B. is being taken care

C. is taken care of

D. is being taken care of

9. In my opinion, the Great Wall is worth _____ again.

A. visiting

B. to be visited

C. being visited

D. to visit

10. I find French hard _____.

A. learned

B. learning

C. to learn

D. to be learned

11. The polluted water isn't fit _____.

A. to be drunk

B. to drink

C. drunk

D. drinking

12. The manager entered the office and was happy to learn that four-fifths of the tickets _____.

A. was booked

B. had been booked

C. were booked

D. have been booked

13. In that village there are many sick people, so Doctor Green is always _____.

A. asked for

B. waited for

C. looked for

D. sent for

14. — Do you have anything more _____, Sir?

— No, you can have a rest or do something else.

A. typing

B. to be typed

C. typed

D. to type

15. All the books _____ before I got to the bookshop.

A. had been sold out

B. have been sold out

C. have sold out

D. had sold out

16. Peter is often seen _____ in the park.

A. to read Chinese

B. read Chinese

C. to read China

D. reading China

17. The fish _____ perfect.

A. is smelled

B. are smelt

C. smells

D. smell

18. “Titanic” was the largest ship that _____ at that time.

A. was ever built

B. has ever built

C. had ever been built

D. has ever been built

19. My radio _____ now.

A. got repaired

B. is getting repaired

C. is getting being repaired

D. is repaired

20. Jenny _____ a man who was her classmate.

A. was married by

B. marries

C. married

D. got married by

21. None of them _____ for the accident.

A. should be blamed

B. should blame

C. can be blamed

D. can blamed

22. The dictionary _____ me.

A. is belonged to

B. belong

C. belongs to

D. is belonged

23. “Do you have any clothes _____ today, Sir?” asked the servant politely.

A. to wash

B. being washed

C. to be washed

D. washing

24. Lots of _____ experiments _____ in our lab.

A. interesting; carry out

B. interested; carry out

C. interesting; are carried out

D. interested; are carried out

25. There will be speech on history _____ next week.

A. given

B. to give

C. to be given

D. being given

26. The teacher _____ to the party last week came from England.

A. invited

B. being invited

C. to be invited

D. was invited

27. I have got enough room _____ all of us.

A. to be seated

B. to seat

C. seating

D. seated

28. Mr. Smith is the only doctor for you _____.

A. sent for

B. sending for

C. to send for

D. to be sent for

29. Hundreds of jobs _____ if the factory closes.

A. lose

B. will be lost

C. are lost

D. will lose

30. The United Nations, which _____ in 1945, is playing a more and more important part in international affairs.

A. was set up

B. set up

C. had set up

D. had been set up

31. Everything _____ if Albert hadn't called the fire department immediately after the fire broke out.

A. would destroy

B. would have destroyed

C. would be destroyed

D. would have been destroyed

32. — I don't know how to get there.

— I'll show you the right road _____.

A. to take

B. to be taken

C. taking

D. taken

33. My daughter _____ a doctor three years ago.

A. was married

B. married with

C. married to

D. got married to

34. These dishes _____ easily.

A. don't clean

B. are not cleaned

C. have not been

D. are not to be cleaned

35. — My hair is so long.

— You should _____.

A. have you hair being cut

B. have your hair cut

C. have you hair to be cut

D. cut your hairs

36. The homework I got down to do _____ yesterday evening at last.

A. be finished

B. do was finished

C. was finished

D. being finished

37. The old man phoned police that he _____ his money.

A. robbed

B. robbed of

C. was robbed

D. was robbed of

38. I have just called Peter and he _____ to return soon.

A. expects

B. expected

C. is expected

D. will expect

39. — When should I pay money?

— The money _____ at once.

A. should pay

B. should be paid

C. be paying

D. should be paid for

40. — I'd like to go into lab.

— I'm sorry, John. Only scientists are _____ into the lab.

A. required

B. admitted

C. supposed

D. intended

助动词和情态动词练习

1. — The phone is ringing.

— It _____ be David. He told me he would call me tonight.

A. will

B. may

C. must

D. can

2. It is raining heavily now, so I _____ stay at home.

A. must

B. have to

C. can

D. should

3. — Must I clean the window?

— No, you _____.

A. must not

B. needn't

C. can't

D. may not

4. Laws ought _____ by everyone including president.

A. to obey

B. obey

C. be obey

D. to be obeyed

5. Look at your eyes. You must have cried, _____?

A. mustn't

B. have not you

C. wasn't you

D. didn't you

6. She _____ yesterday's examination, but she didn't.

A. should have passed

B. would pass

C. must have passed

D. should pass

7. I _____ go abroad next week.

A. am to

B. could

C. can

D. may

8. — You hurt him deeply.

— I _____.

A. didn't mean

B. didn't mean to

C. can't mean

D. mustn't mean

9. He was to _____ work next month, but he changed his mind.

A. start

B. be starting

C. got started

D. have started

10. Bruce spent as much as he _____ fishing.

A. could

B. went

C. could to go

D. could going

11. Although I’ve never seen your daughter, I guess this little girl _____ be your daughter.

A. would

B. should

C. can

D. must

12. If you do as I tell you, you _____ be successful

A. shall

B. may

C. can

D. will

13. — May I use your pen?

— No, _____.

A. you can't

B. you mustn't

C. you may not

D. you needn't

14. I _____ read books when I was four years old.

A. can

B. could

C. may

D. might

15. Let's go for a walk, _____?

A. shall we

B. will you

C. don't you

D. do we

16. Let us go for a walk, _____?

A. shall we

B. will you

C. don't you

D. do we

17. — Could I borrow your bike?

— Yes, of course you _____.

A. will

B. could

C. might

D. can

18. I _____ eat apples than oranges.

A. would rather

B. had better

C. like better

D. prefer

19. You must be a football player, _____?

A. must you

B. are you

C. aren't you

D. mustn't you

20. — Will you go with David?

— No, I _____.

A. wouldn't

B. won't

C. shouldn't

D. shall not

21. I missed the first bus, so I _____ wait for the next bus.

A. must

B. have to

C. may

D. had to

22. The room is dark; Ricky _____ to bed.

A. should go

B. must go

C. should have gone

D. must have gone

23. The football match was wonderful! You _____ it

A. must go to see

B. may see

C. must have gone to see

D. should have gone to see

24. You _____ start early.

A. would better

B. had better

C. had better to

D. have better

25. _____ a good time in America?

A. Had you

B. Have you had

C. Have you

D. Have you got

26. He had me _____ shy.

A. feel

B. felt

C. to be

D. to feel

27. _____ so stupid as to repeat your mistakes.

A. Do

B. Don't

C. Don't be

D. Do be

28. To be honest, I _____ like math.

A. did never

B. don't never

C. never would

D. do never

29. He likes music, and I _____ as well.

A. do

B. do it

C. do so

D. do that

30. If you keep going on with your study, you _____ be successful.

A. would

B. will

C. should

D. may

31. — Would you like to have a cup of tea?

— I _____.

A. would like

B. like

C. must have liked

D. like it

32. He _____ to visit Beijing.

A. used

B. use not

C. is not used

D. was not used

33. — Could you lend your pen?

— Yes, _____.

A. I could

B. you could

C. I can

D. you may

34. This question is rather difficult, so you _____ too careful.

A. can't be

B. must be

C. should

D. can be

35. I can't help _____ that she was my classmate.

A. remember

B. to remember

C. but remember

D. remembering

36. John _____ be wrong, but I don't think he is.

A. can

B. must

C. should

D. would

37. — May I break the rule?

— No, you _____.

A. wouldn't

B. may not

C. mustn't

D. needn't

38. _____ to say that you are against him?

A. Do you dare

B. Need you dare

C. Did you dare

D. Had you dared

39. I don't think you _____ about your son.

A. need to worry

B. need to worrying

C. need to being worried

D. need worried

40. I _____ late, but the traffic was heavy.

A. shouldn't have been

B. wouldn't have been

C. should not be

D. would not be

41. It is five o'clock. We _____ so early.

A. need not get up

B. need not have got up

C. need not to get up

D. need not getting up

第八天

突破英语的非谓语动词

Tips：

今天进入英语中最难的语法现象的学习，再难的语法点都有办法掌握。先来解释一下非谓语动词，实际上，如果把谓语的形式放在一边来说，单纯一个动词从语法功能上来说一定是谓语，但是当动词的形式发生变化，不再作谓语时，也就是非谓语动词了。

在英语中，动词是用于作谓语的，而谓语一般也是由动词来做的。但是却有一类动词形式，它们不做句中的谓语，而作句子的其他成分，我们把这种动词形式称为非谓语动词。非谓语动词包括：不定式、动名词和分词（过去分词和现在分词）。

Tips：

有些语法书中把动名词和现在分词放在一起讲解，但在本书中还是把它们分开讲解。

8.1　不定式

不定式是由“to（有时省略）+动词原形”所构成的（切记to be也是不定式），它虽然仍具有动词形式，但是已经失去了动词的功能。它在句中可做主语、表语、宾语、宾语补足语、定语和状语等。

e.g.: To see is to believe
.

眼见为实。（不定式作主语、表语）

She likes to go
to the park.

她想要去公园。（不定式作宾语）

I want you to have
a dinner with me.

我想和你一起吃饭。（不定式作宾语补足语）

There is something to drink
in the fridge.

冰箱里有些喝的东西。（不定式作表语）

He got up so early to catch
the first train.

他起得这么早是为了赶上头班火车。（不定式作状语）

Tips：

在这里抛弃传统的语法学习方法，因为一般在讲非谓语动词时都是列举它们在做句子成分中的用法，而本章则是总结出应该在不定式的学习中需要注意的几个问题。

（1）有些及物动词后必须加不定式作宾语。它们是：like（喜欢），wish（祝愿），hate（讨厌），hope（希望），continue（继续），want（想要），manage（设法），offer（提供），start（开始），begin（开始），promise（承诺），pretend（假装），intend（打算），decide（决定），learn（学习），desire（羡慕），agree（同意），care（关心），choose（选择），expect（期望），refuse（拒绝），fail（失败），plan（计划）等。

e.g.: They planned to have
a picnic near the lake.

他们计划在湖边搞一个聚餐。

The policeman managed to let
the thieves speak out the truth.

警察设法使小偷们说出真相。

有些及物动词后必须加不定式作宾语补足语。它们是：ask（问），tell（告诉），invite（邀请），force（迫使），get（使），allow（允许），wish（祝愿），want（想要），like（喜欢），hate（讨厌），help（帮助），leave（使），expect（期望），prefer（宁愿），encourage（鼓励），advise（劝告），persuade（说服），permit（允许），remind（提醒），request（要求），order（命令），warn（警告），mean（打算），cause（引起）等。

e.g.: The woman warned her son not to drive
home after drinking.

那女人告诫她儿子不要酒后驾车。

He always encourages us to try best to do our job.

他总是鼓励我们做好工作。

（2）用it代替不定式作形式主语，不定式作真正的主语的情况。

e.g.: It is impossible to go
abroad.

出国是不可能的。

结构：It +be + adj. +不定式.

Tips：

不定式在句子中是真正的主语，它位于句末，而it为形式主语位于句首，这样的替代关系是为了平衡句子。

e.g.: It is necessary to learn
English well.

学好英语是有必要的。

（3）使役动词和感观动词之后宾语补足语的情况。

①使役动词是表示“使……”的一类动词，主要包括：make, get, let, have等，当不定式作它们的宾语补足语时，要将to省略（除了get）。

e.g.: I made the door open.

我把门打开了。

Tips：

原句为“I made the door to open
.”因为make是使役动词，所以将to省略。

②感观动词是表示人体器官所能知道的感觉的一类动词，主要包括：smell, taste, hear, see等，当不定式作它们的宾语补足语时，要将to省略。

e.g.: I saw an old man walk past the road.

我看见一个老头过马路。

Tips：

原句为“I saw an old man to walk
past the road.”因为see是使役动词，所以将to省略。

（4）不定式作定语时的不同情况。

e.g.: a. The last question to be discussed
is very easy.

最后一个讨论的问题很简单。

b. The last question is very easy to discuss
.

最后一个问题很容易讨论。

Tips：

在a句中，“问题很容易被讨论”，所以用被动的不定式；而在b句中“问题仍然是被讨论”，但我们却用主动语态，原因在于b句的不定式在句中修饰表语且句子结构为系表结构，所以不定式用主动语态代替被动语态。

e.g.: There is something to eat
on the desk.

桌子上有些吃的东西。

The problem is hard to solve
.

这个问题很难以解决。

（5）不定式的否定式、被动式、完成体和复合结构。

①不定式的否定式为not to+动词原形。

e.g.: I asked him not to touch
that wall.

我要他不要碰那面墙。

Tips：

非谓语动词的否定形式一定要在完整结构前否定，不可以把to do拆开再去否定。

②不定式的被动式为to be+过去分词。

e.g.: This job is to be done
next week.

这项工作下周做。

③不定式的完成体为to have+现在分词。

e.g.: I am sorry to have you waiting
for a long time.

我很抱歉让你等了这么久。

④不定式的复合结构为for somebody to do something。

e.g.: It is impossible for her to go abroad
.

她出国是有可能的。

It is very kind of you to do
it.

你这样做太好了。

Tips：

这里用的是“of somebody to do something”，当形容词是表示某人的品质、性格时，用此结构。

e.g.: It is rather foolish of her to want
to go to university.

她想上大学实在是太傻了。

8.2　动名词

动名词是由动词原形在词尾加-ing构成的。它的作用相当于名词，在句中可作主语、宾语、表语、宾语补足语和定语等。

e.g.: Seeing
is believing
.

眼见为实。（动名词作主语、表语）

He likes playing
basketball.

他喜欢打篮球。（动名词作宾语）

I saw a cat coming
across the road.

我看见一只猫正在过马路。（动名词作宾语补足语）

His walking
stick is long.

他的手杖很长。（动名词作定语）

在动名词的学习中需要明白以下几个问题。

（1）有些及物动词后必须加动名词作宾语。它们是：avoid（避免），finish（完成），suggest（建议），mind（介意），enjoy（喜欢），require（要求），delay（延迟），practice（练习），consider（考虑），miss（想念），imagine（想象），give up（放弃），can't help（忍不住）等。

e.g.: She couldn't help laughing
when she heard the news.

当她听见这个消息时，他忍不住笑了。

Everyone can't avoid making
mistakes in our society.

社会中的每个人难免不犯错误。

（2）用it代替动名词作形式主语，动名词作真正的主语的情况。

e.g.: It's no use doing
like this.

这样做没有用处。

It's no good helping
them cope with this affair.

帮助他们处理这件事没有好处。

Tips：

只有在use和good后用it代替动名词作形式主语。

（3）动名词作宾语补足语和不定式作宾语补足语的区别。

e.g.: a. I saw him going
upstairs.

我看见他正在上楼。

b. I saw him go
upstairs.

我看见他上楼。

Tips：

在a句中，动名词作宾语补足语表示“正在发生的动作或看见动作发生的全过程”，而在b句中，不定式作宾语补足语则表示“已经发生的动作或只注意动作的结果”。

（4）有些及物动词后既可接不定式做宾语又可接动名词做宾语，注意他们的区别。

（5）动名词的的否定式，被动式和完成体。

①动名词的否定式为not+动名词。

e.g.: Not going
to the park is very reasonable.

不去公园是十分有道理的。

②动名词的被动式为being+过去分词。

e.g.: She prided herself on being
called “beauty”.

她因为被叫作“美人”而感到自豪。

③动名词的完成体为having+过去分词。

e.g.: He denied having seen
this film.

他否认看过这部电影。

8.3　分词

分词包括现在分词（由动词原形在词尾加-ing构成）和过去分词（由动词原形在词尾加-ed构成）两种。分词具有形容词和副词的一些性质，它们在句中可作定语、表语、宾语补足语和补语等。

e.g.: Boiling
water is hot.

开水很烫。（现在分词作定语）

The door is broken
.

门坏了。（过去分词作表语）

I saw an old lady climbing
the hill.

我看见一个老太太正在爬山。（现在分词作宾语补足语）

Arriving
at the railway station, we missed the train.

当我们到达火车站时，我们错过了火车。（现在分词作补语）

在分词的学习中我们需要明白以下几个问题。

（1）现在分词和过去分词作定语的区别。

Tips：

现在分词作定语时表示“正在、主动”的意义，而过去分词作定语时则表示“被动、完成”的意义。这两种不是都要出现的，也就是说，现在分词既可以表示“正在”，又可以表示“主动”，不一定要在一个分词中把两个含义都表达出来。

（2）分词作定语修饰中心词时，它们位置的情况。

e.g.: the missing
boy

丢失的孩子（分词是一个词时，它放在被修饰词的前面。）

the boy standing
by the table

站在桌边的男孩（分词是一个词组时，它放在被修饰词的后面。）

（3）分词短语作状语时的情况。

这一点是英语最难的语法现象，英语中的三大难点：分词、虚拟语气和定语从句。实际上分词作状语的现象是最难的，在这里需要注意以下三个问题。

①分词短语作状语其逻辑主语的情况。

Arriving
at the railway station, they missed the train.

当他们到达火车站时，他们错过了火车。

Tips：

arriving at the railway station是现在分词作时间状语，那么它必然会有动作的发出者，有人说这不是非谓语动词，怎么会有主语呢？实际上，难点就在这里，因为在非谓语动词中，不定式和动名词已经基本完全失去了动词的性质，被称为“完全非谓语动词”，但是分词没有完全失去动词的性质，一半副词的含义，一半动词的含义，被称为“非完全非谓语动词”。所以，在分词作状语的时候，当然要寻找所谓的“主语”，也被称为“逻辑主语”。分词作状语时，逻辑主语要和主句的主语保持一致，所以arriving at the railway station的逻辑主语就是they，而不能按照中文中的翻译方式：“Arriving at the railway station, the train left. 到了火车站，火车走了。”

e.g.: Seeing
from the top of the hill, I saw the beautiful view.

从山顶上我看到美丽的风景。（seeing的逻辑主语是I 。）

Seen from the top of the hill, the city is beautiful.

从山顶看，城市很美丽。（seen的逻辑主语是the city，所以用过去分词。）

②分词的一般体和完成体作状语时的区别。

e.g.: Having had
breakfast, we started to have a meeting.

吃完饭后我们开始开会。

Tips：

having had breakfast发生在we started to have a meeting之前，而不是同时进行。前面的分词短语相当于时间状语从语after we had breakfast。

e.g.: Having seen
the film, Tom and I needed to have a shower.

在看完电影后，汤姆和我需要洗澡。（having seen the film在needed to have a shower之前发生。）

e.g.: Washing my hands, I had lunch.

我边洗手边吃饭。

Having washed my hands, I had lunch.

我先洗手后吃饭。

上面一句是分词的一般式，它所表示的含义是和主句一起发生的，但是下面一句用的则是分词的完成体，它所表示的是动作的先后发生。

③分词的独立主格结构。

在具体的句子中也会遇到这样的句型：

Arriving at the railway station, the train has been away for several minutes.

实际上这句话是错误的，需要把它改正过来，主要的方法是在状语的前面加上一个逻辑主语，这样就变成了：

We arriving at the railway station, the train has been away for several minutes.

奇怪的结构出现了：“名词+分词”的结构，这样的结构被称为“分词的独立结构”。

e.g.: This done, he left the room.

这事做完后，他离开了房间。

前后主语不一致，但是正确，前面一个是词组，而不是句子，是分词的独立结构。

e.g.: That being the case, we had better make another plan.

因为事情总是这样，我们最好还是有另外一个计划。

前后主语不一致，但是正确，前面一个是词组，而不是句子，是分词的独立结构。

小结：
在这章中主要讲解非谓语动词的知识，而且也没有用传统的教学法来给大家讲述，希望大家能记住讲述的几个问题，这些知识点需要记忆。下面我们来看这样几个问题：

（1）非谓语动词分为几类？分别是什么？

（2）学习不定式时应注意的几个问题是什么？分别怎么学习？

（3）学习动名词时应注意的几个问题是什么？分别怎么学习？

（4）学习分词时应注意的几个问题是什么？分别怎么学习？

（5）分词作状语时要注意几个问题？

（6）分词的独立主格是什么含义？怎么使用？

希望大家能够认真地回答以上的问题，牢牢地记住以上问题的答案是今天学习最大的收获，也是突破非谓语动词的法宝。

练习

1. Don't you remember _____?

A. seeing the man before

B. to see the man before

C. saw the man before

D. to have seen the man before

2. Paul from normal university practiced _____ in the middle school.

A. to teach

B. to be teaching

C. teaching

D. having taught

3. I decided _____ a teacher.

A. not to become

B. not to have become

C. to have become

D. to have not become

4. I'm glad to _____ an opportunity to interview you.

A. give

B. be giving

C. be given

D. have not been given

5. _____ a windy day, we gave up our plan to sail.

A. With it

B. It being

C. Being

D. Because it being

6. I'm going to have my radio _____.

A. fixed

B. to fix

C. fix

D. fixing

7. I preferred to _____ at home rather than _____.

A. stay; camp

B. staying; camping

C. stay; to camp

D. staying; to camping

8. I preferred _____ at home to _____ such a party.

A. stay; join

B. staying; joining

C. to stay; joining

D. staying; join

9. _____ in front of it, this old house needs _____.

A. To see; repairing

B. Seen; repairing

C. Having seen; making repairs

D. Seeing; to be repaired

10. The moon was shining brightly _____ everything there _____ more romantic.

A. having; look

B. to have; looked

C. and had; looks

D. having; be looked

11. The girl kept on _____ when her mother came in.

A. to write

B. lying in bed

C. dancing to the music

D. to dance to the music

12. He ran away quickly, _____ his friend _____ in the middle of the playground.

A. to leave; standing

B. to leave; to stand

C. leaving; to stand

D. leaving; standing

13. The boy wanted to ride his bicycle in the street, but his mother told him _____.

A. not to

B. not to do

C. not do it

D. do not to

14. I'm enjoying _____ the vacation in Qingdao with my parents last year.

A. being spent

B. to have spent

C. having spent

D. having been spent

15. Having a walk along the seaside, I felt like _____ in the sea.

A. to go swimming

B. go swimming

C. going swimming

D. to go to swim

16. He did nothing but _____.

A. to read

B. reading

C. read

D. to have read

17. I was heard _____ that I fell in love with her.

A. say

B. to saying

C. to say

D. said

18. _____ what you say, he is an honest man.

A. Judging from

B. Judged from

C. Having judged

D. To judge

19. _____, the U.S. is stronger than Iraq.

A. To speaking

B. Generally speaking

C. Generally to have spoken

D. Generally speak

20. With night _____, they come back home.

A. be fell

B. fell

C. falling

D. falls

21. It is no use _____ him not to cheat in the exams.

A. for you to have told

B. you tell

C. your telling

D. having told

22. — It can't work.

— Why not _____ it in another way?

A. try to solve

B. trying to solve

C. try solving

D. trying solve

23. The thief was caught with two hands _____.

A. tied

B. to be tied

C. being tied

D. having been tied

24. John was made _____ the truck for a week as a punishment.

A. to wash

B. washing

C. wash

D. to be washing

25. — The light in the room is still on.

— I'm sorry, I forgot _____.

A. turning it off

B. turn it off

C. to turn it off

D. having turned it off

26. Do you know whose dog _____ under the table?

A. lay

B. lain

C. laying

D. lying

27. I don't allow _____ in my office.

A. smoking

B. to smoke

C. people to smoking

D. people smoking

28. I don't allow _____ TV.

A. my son to watch

B. my son watching

C. to watch

D. my son to have watched

29. It is dark. You'd better _____.

A. to stay at home

B. staying at home

C. stay at home

D. to have stayed at home

30. You'd better _____ your son _____.

A. to have; to work hard

B. have; work hard

C. have; to work hard

D. have; worked hard

31. Your hair is so long. You'd better have _____.

A. it cut

B. it cutted

C. it cutting

D. it to cut

32. He suggested _____ with him.

A. going shopping

B. to going shopping

C. go shopping

D. going shop

33. When I heard from him, I couldn't help _____.

A. jump with joy

B. jumping with joy

C. jumping in joy

D. to jumping in joy

34. The officers narrowly escaped _____ in the hot battle.

A. have killed

B. to kill

C. to be killed

D. being killed

35. Peter went on _____ his homework after having a rest.

A. with

B. to do

C. doing

D. to have done

36. This novel is worth _____.

A. to read

B. of reading

C. reading

D. of to be read

37. His suggestion is worthy _____.

A. of being considered

B. to consider

C. considering

D. of considering

38. Their house was destroyed in the earthquake, so they have no room _____.

A. to live

B. to live in

C. living

D. living in

39. I found the question difficult _____.

A. to answer

B. to be answered

C. to answer it

D. answering

40. The question is difficult _____.

A. to answer

B. to be answered

C. to answer it

D. answering

41. People were used to _____ clothes of cotton and wool, but now more and more other materials are used to _____ clothes as well.

A. making; making

B. making; make

C. making; made

D. make; make

42. I don't attend the meeting _____ in the office at present, but I'll attend the meeting _____ in the office tomorrow.

A. held; being held

B. to be held; to be held

C. to be held; held

D. being held; to be held

43. One learns a language by making mistakes and _____ them.

A. correct

B. correcting

C. corrects

D. to correct

44. When I came in, I found a cat _____ in sofa.

A. lie

B. lying

C. to be lying

D. laying

45. Why do you have the water _____ all the time?

A. ran

B. to be running

C. running

D. being running

46. I'm very glad to see the question _____.

A. answer

B. answered

C. being answered

D. answering

47. I studied philosophy in a university _____ by many trees.

A. surrounding

B. to surround

C. surrounded

D. to be surrounded

48. The classroom was so noisy that the teacher couldn't make herself _____.

A. hear

B. heard

C. hearing

D. to hear

49. I often hear both teachers and students _____ highly of him.

A. to speak

B. spoken

C. speak

D. to be spoken

50. The city is said _____ in a terrible earthquake a month ago.

A. to be destroyed

B. to have been destroyed

C. having been destroyed

D. to destroy

51. The temple was found _____ empty.

A. being

B. to be

C. is

D. was

52. I seem _____ her somewhere before.

A. to see

B. to have seen

C. to be seeing

D. seeing

53. They seem _____ along quite well now.

A. to be getting

B. getting

C. to get

D. getting

54. No one can avoid _____ by advertisements.

A. to be influenced

B. having influenced

C. influenced

D. being influenced

55. We are looking forward to _____ fashion show next month.

A. watch

B. watching

C. be watching

D. have watched

56. My bike is so old that it needs _____.

A. repair

B. repaired

C. repairing

D. to repair

57. I found the door _____ and no one was in the office.

A. to lock

B. to be locked

C. locking

D. locked

58. I'm sorry for keeping you _____ for two hours.

A. waiting

B. wait

C. to wait

D. waited

59. I'm busy _____ the examination.

A. preparing for

B. with preparing

C. preparing with

D. to prepare

60. I regret _____ that your mother fell ill the day before yesterday.

A. saying

B. to say

C. telling

D. to tell

61. — Your son has not attended classes for four days.

— What? It's not likely for him _____ so many classes

A. missing

B. to miss

C. having missed

D. to have missed

62. Charles Babbage is generally considered _____ the first computer.

A. to invent

B. inventing

C. to have invented

D. having invented

63. _____ more attention, the trees could have grown better.

A. Given

B. To give

C. Giving

D. Having given

64. It's no use _____ over spilt milk.

A. cry

B. to cry

C. crying

D. be crying

65. I don't mind _____ by him.

A. interrupted

B. to be interrupted

C. being interrupted

D. interrupted

66. Mary was seen _____ the office.

A. enter

B. to enter

C. be entering

D. to entering

67. Your work requires _____ carefully.

A. doing

B. to do

C. being done

D. done

68. The whole house requires _____.

A. to be painted

B. to be painting

C. being painted

D. to paint

69. I wish you'll succeed _____ him with his task.

A. help

B. helping

C. to help

D. in helping

70. Everyone is afraid of _____.

A. laughing

B. laughing at

C. being laughed

D. being laughed at

71. I have difficult _____ the walkman.

A. repair

B. in repairing

C. repaired

D. to repair

72. _____ from the window, I found the city was so bright.

A. See

B. Seeing

C. Seen

D. To see

73. _____ from the window, the city was so bright.

A. See

B. Seeing

C. Seen

D. To see

74. Reading is _____, and I'm _____ in reading.

A. interesting; interested

B. interesting; interesting

C. interest; interesting

D. interested; interesting

75. _____ to the wedding, Mr. Brown didn't mind it.

A. Having not been invited

B. Not having been invited

C. Having not invited

D. Not having invited

76. He devoted his life to _____ AIDS.

A. study

B. studying

C. learn

D. learning

77. When the teacher came into classroom, these students stopped _____.

A. talk

B. talking

C. to talking

D. having talking

78. I spent three years _____ a novel.

A. write

B. writing

C. to write

D. writed

79. Please remember _____ these books after reading them.

A. put away

B. to put away

C. putting away

D. to be put away

80. My mother promised _____ me new clothes.

A. buy

B. buying

C. to buy for

D. to buy

81. It is no good _____ other's weakness.

A. to laugh at

B. laughing at

C. to laugh

D. laughing

82. Could you image _____ as a doctor?

A. yourself work

B. you to work

C. yourself working

D. you to be working

83. I went to Canada _____ English.

A. for learning

B. to learn

C. learning

D. and learn

84. The chief denied _____ 1000 dollars before.

A. to steal

B. stealing

C. stole

D. having stolen

85. The teachers don't permit _____ in examinations.

A. cheated

B. to cheat

C. cheating

D. to cheating

86. I know the man _____ by John.

A. described

B. describing

C. describe

D. to describe

87. I often think of the _____ scene.

A. excited

B. excite

C. to excite

D. exciting

88. With the new year _____, the little town looks blooming（繁荣）.

A. come

B. to coming

C. will come

D. coming

89. _____ there will be of great help to them.

A. You go

B. You going

C. Your going

D. Yours going

90. When _____, ice changes into water.

A. heating

B. heated

C. to heat

D. having heated

91. I object to _____.

A. him wasting of time

B. his wasting of time

C. him to waste of time

D. his to waste of time

92. I appreciate _____ me with so much money.

A. you supply

B. your to supply

C. you supplying

D. your supplying

93. I happened to _____ his address before.

A. having known

B. have known

C. knowing

D. known

94. It's dark now. I hoped _____ the work earlier.

A. to finish

B. finish

C. having finished

D. to have finished

95. My teacher took the trouble to _____ me how to learn English.

A. telling

B. tell

C. have told

D. tells

96. The woman would rather _____ than go by ship.

A. traveled by train

B. traveling

C. to travel in train

D. travel by train

97. Alex insisted _____ money.

A. asking for

B. on asking for

C. to ask for

D. on asking

98. The old lady used to _____ at the bank of the river.

A. have a walk

B. having a walk

C. take walk

D. taking walk

99. She pretended _____ me when I passed by.

A. not to see

B. not seeing

C. to not see

D. having not seen

100. He is going to start now _____ miss the film.

A. as to

B. not so as to

C. so as not to

D. not to

101. — Would you like to join my birthday party?

— I'd _____.

A. love

B. like

C. like to it

D. love to

第九天

突破英语的虚拟语气

Tips：

在英语动词的学习中，最为重要的是动词的时态、语态和语气，而又以语气最为重要。今天就要学习英语中最难的语法现象之一——虚拟语气。实际上，大家只要按照本书中结构学习法，相信学习虚拟语气也是很简单的。中文当中也存在很多的虚拟语气，我们一般是用“如果”或“要是”等词来表示，这一点和英语很相似，但是英语中还有很多其他的用法，让我们来看看吧！

9.1　虚拟语气

1. 语气的定义

语气是用动词的不同形式来表达说话人不同态度的一种语法现象。

2. 语气的种类

一般来说，语气可以分为以下4种。

（1）陈述语气：表示说话的人直接陈述某种事实的语气。

e.g.: I am a nurse.

我是个护士。

I have already finished this job.

我已经完成工作了。

（2）疑问语气：表示说话的人提出问题或对某事实产生疑问的语气。

e.g.: What is your name?

你叫什么名字？

Does he like swimming?

他喜欢游泳吗？

（3）祈使语气：表示说话的人要求、命令、请求等的语气。

e.g.: Be careful!

小心！

Keep away from the fence!

远离栅栏！

（4）虚拟语气：表示说话的人主观的愿望、假设和猜想等的语气，一般和事实不相符合。

e.g.: If I were you, I would not marry her.

如果我是你，我不会和她结婚的。

They suggested that they (should) have more money.

他们建议应有更多的钱。

9.2　虚拟语气和条件句

条件句实际上是属于状语从句的一种，其功能可以说是说话人猜想、假设的一种条件。按其真实程度来分，可以分为真实条件句和非真实条件句两种。

e.g.: If it rains tomorrow
, we will put off the sports meeting.

如果明天下雨，我们就推迟运动会。（表示可能实现，真实条件句）

If I were Tom
, I would not refuse the money.

如果我是汤姆，我就不会拒绝这些钱的。（表示不可能实现，非真实条件句）

按照时间上的划分，虚拟条件句（非真实条件句）又可以分为现在、过去、将来3种情况。

e.g.: If I were you, I should not marry her.

如果我是你，我就不会和她结婚。（和现在情况相反）

If the fridge were broken, please call us to repair it.

如果冰箱坏了，通知我们来修。（和将来情况相反）

If I had been you, I should not have married her.

如果我以前是你，我就不会和她结婚。（和过去情况相反）

表9-1　条件句

if条件句

结果主句

和现在情况相反

If I（其他人称）+动词的过去式（be动词用were）

I（其他人称）should/would+动词原形

和将来情况相反

If I（其他人称）+动词的过去式（be动词用were）

I（其他人称）should/would+动词原形

和过去情况相反

If I（其他人称）+had+动词过去分词

I（其他人称）should/would+have+动词过去分词

学习过程中要注意3点。

（1）单独条件句的使用可以表示某种感情色彩。

e.g.: If your father had not been dead.

要是你爸爸没死该有多好啊！（表示某种遗憾和怜悯）

（2）凡是be动词用于一般过去时都应该使用were，而不是was。

e.g.: If I were you, I would not promise a lot to her.

如果我是你的话，我不会对她承诺那么多的。

（实际上在一般语法知识里我们认为应该使用I was而不是I were，但是在虚拟语气中就必须用成I were。）

（3）从句中出现了had，should和were的时候可以引起倒装。

e.g.: If I had been you, I should not have married her.

这句话可以倒装成为：Had I been you, I should not have married her.

注意省略if，并且把这三个词都放在句首。

9.3　虚拟语气和从句

（1）虚拟语气在主语从句中的使用。

当主语从句中出现important, essential, appropriate, vital, unfair, strange, natural等时，主语从句的动词形式要用should+动词原形，should一般省略。

e.g.: It is vital that we (should) finish the task.

我们完成任务很重要。

It is unfair that they (should) get many more jobs.

他们得到更多的工作是不公平的。

（2）虚拟语气在表语从句中的使用。

当表语从句中出现decision, suggestion, requirement, idea等时，表语从句的动词形式要用should+动词原形，should一般省略。

e.g.: Our decision is that you (should) go to hospital.

我们的决定是你要去医院。

His suggestion is that you and I (should) kill these people.

他的建议是你和我要杀这些人。

（3）虚拟语气在同位语从句中的使用。

当同位语从句中出现decision，suggestion，requirement，idea，demand，resolution等时，同位语从句的动词形式要用should+动词原形，should一般省略。

e.g.: He gave me a resolution that men (should) be punished.

他给出的解决方案是男人必须受到惩罚。

They had demands that president (should) resign.

他们要求总统要辞职。

（4）虚拟语气在宾语从句中的使用。

当主句动词出现suggest，demand，advise，propose，urge等时，宾语从句的动词形式要用should+动词原形，should一般省略。

e.g.: They suggested that woman (should) be paid more money.

他们建议说女人应得更多的报酬。

She advised that our oral English (should) be improved.

她建议我们的口语应该提高。

Tips：

在从句中使用虚拟语气，一个单词的词根引起了虚拟语气，那么它的所有衍生词和其他形式都可以引起这种虚拟语气，和它引起什么样的虚拟语气没有任何关系。

9.4　虚拟语气的特殊用法

（1）表示某种祝愿。

e.g.: God bless you!

上帝保佑你！

Long live Chairman Mao!

毛主席万岁！

（2）It is (about/high) time ... 后接句子应用一般过去时。

e.g.: It is (high) time we went.

我们该回家了。

It is (high) time we caught the robbers.

是该我们抓强盗了。

（3）由to think引导的句子，表示“没想到”。

e.g.: To think that he was a girl.

真没想到他是个女孩。

To think that she was such a woman.

真没想到她是这样一个人。

（4）as it were做插入语，表示“姑且这么说”。

e.g.: I, as it were, eat like a horse.

我吃起来简直像匹马啊！

He looks like a lion as it were.

他看上去简直就像是头狮子。

（5）if need be做插入语，表示“如果有必要的话”。

e.g.: I can go anywhere if need be.

如果有必要的话我可以去任何地方。

If need be, you will have 5 meals a day.

如果有必要的话你一天要吃5顿饭。

（6）would have thought表示“会想到，会以为”。

e.g.: Who would have thought to meet a white elephant.

谁会想到会遇到一头白象啊！

They would have thought they might get more money.

他们会以为拿到更多的钱。

（7）虚拟条件句的某些倒装。

在某些虚拟条件句中，有时候if可以省略，这时句子要发生部分倒装。

e.g.: Were I you, I would not marry her.

如果我是你，我就不会和她结婚的。

Should he be interested in learning English, he will keep touch with me.

如果他对学习英语感兴趣，他会和我保持联系的。

（8）“情态动词+have+动词过去分词”的用法（详见于情态动词一节）。

（9）wish后宾语从句的情况。

a. 与现在和将来情况相反，宾语从句动词形式用一般过去时。

e.g.: I wish she had a baby.

我祝愿她能有个孩子。

I wish they went to home.

我希望他们能到家。

b. 与过去情况相反，宾语从句动词形式用过去完成时。

e.g.: I wished that she had not been dead.

我真希望她没死啊！

He wished that he had not come.

他真希望他没来过啊！

小结：
今天学习了虚拟语气，可以看出主要有3个部分：虚拟条件句、虚拟语气在从句中的使用和虚拟语气一些特殊用法的识别。那么，动词的学习也就结束语了，本书花了很大的篇幅来介绍动词，它是英语中最重要的一部分。在学习动词时，始终要贯穿这样一条主线：定义—分类—基本形式—时态—语态—助动词和情态动词—非谓语动词—虚拟语气，动词的词尾屈折变化更加重要。学好动词可以为学好英语打下坚实的基础。还是请大家来看一下几个关于虚拟语气的问题吧！

（1）虚拟条件句可以分为几种？时态分别是什么？

（2）从句当中是如何使用虚拟语气的？

（3）特殊用法大家都能记住吗？

如果这几天以来关于动词的所有问题都能回答的话，那么我们英语语法的学习就能够迈上一个新的台阶。

练习

1. If I _____ you, I wouldn't marry her.

A. were

B. was

C. be

D. is

2. He suggested that we _____ to the park.

A. go

B. went

C. will go

D. gone

3. If only I _____ a very beautiful lady.

A. have

B. has

C. had

D. have been

4. A lot of people wish that there _____ no war in the world.

A. is

B. were

C. have been

D. am

5. It is high time they _____ a delicious supper.

A. have

B. had

C. have been

D. has been

6. Were the trousers cheaper, she _____ it.

A. buy

B. would buy

C. bought

D. will buy

7. Long _____ Chairman Mao!

A. live

B. lived

C. will live

D. have lived

8. Without electricity, edifices _____ suitable for people to live in.

A. wouldn't have been

B. wouldn't be

C. haven't been

D. shouldn't be

9. _____ the man been sent to the hospital, his life would have been saved.

A. Has

B. Will have

C. Had

D. have

10. She looks as if she _____ for several months.

A. hasn't eaten

B. haven't eaten

C. hadn't eaten

D. didn't eat

第十天

突破英语的介词、连词和基本句型

Tips：

今天我们将学习英语词法的最后两部分——介词和连词。介词是关系到名词和代词的一类词，一般传统的语法书是用列举的方法来说明，但是在这里我们用比较的方法来学习常用的介词，而连词在后面并列句的学习中还会讲解一些用法。在这之后，我们就会进入句法的学习，本章主要讲解简单句和并列句的用法。

10.1　介词

1. 定义

介词是用于名词或代词（或相当于名词词组或从句）前，用于表示两者之间关系的一类词。

2. 分类

按照构成介词可分为3类

（1）简单介词。如：in on at with等。

（2）合成介词。如：into onto without within等。

（3）短语介词。如：as a result of due to in case of in the front of等。

Tips：

注意短语介词和介词短语的区别。

in front of 在……前面（短语介词只是介词）

in front of the door 在门前（介词短语是一个短语，是一个介词和名词构成的短语）

3. 常见介词的介绍（在本章中引进比较的方法进行学习）

（1）on, about

e.g.: He wrote a book on
math.

他写了一本关于数学方面的书。

She often talks about
you.

她经常谈论你。

两者都用于表示“关于”，但是前者表示“具体的关于”，特别是表示某个学科，而后者用法广泛。

（2）above, on, over

e.g.: There is a fan above
the ceiling.

房顶上有个电扇。

There is an apple on
the desk.

桌子上有个苹果。

The plane is flying over
the bridge.

飞机正从桥上飞过。

三者都用于表示“在……上”，但是above表示“在……正上方”，还可以表示“在……（温度）的上面”；on表示“在……上面”（与面接触）；而over表示“在……上方”（不与任何物体接触）。

e.g.: It is above
0ºC tomorrow.

明天零度以上。

（3）under, below

e.g.: There is a chair under
the desk.

桌子底下有把椅子。

There are a lot of mines below
the surface.

地表下有许多矿产。

两者都用于表示“在……下面”，但是前者表示“在某物下面”（不与任何物体接触），而后者表示“在……下方”（与物体接触），而且below可以表示“在……（温度）的之下”。

e.g.: It is below
0ºC tomorrow.

明天零度以下。

（4）before, in front of, in the front of

e.g.: Before
having breakfast, we needed to wash our hands.

我们在吃饭之前要洗手。

In front of
the classroom, there is a pig.

教室的前面有一头猪。

In the front of
the classroom, there is a teacher.

教室的前部有一名老师。

三者都用于表示“在……前面”，但是before表示“在时间的前面”，in front of表示“在……前面”（在范围外），而in the front of表示“在……前面”（在范围内）。

（5）across, through

e.g.: The man is coming across
the road.

这个人正在过马路。

A group of people dare not go through
the forest.

这群人不敢穿过森林。

两者都用于表示“穿过”，但是前者表示“从平面穿过”，而后者表示“从内部穿过（立体）”。

（6）after, behind, at the back of

e.g.: After
several days the enemies came.

过了几天，敌人来了。

Behind
him there is a pretty girl.

在他后面有一个漂亮的女孩子。

A lady is sitting at the back of
me.

一个女的正坐在我后面。

三者都用于表示“在……后面”，但是after表示“在时间的后面”，且用于一般过去时；behind表示“在……（位置）后面”；而at the back of表示“在……（某人）背后”。

（7）among, in the middle, in the center of, between

e.g.: That is my son among
a crowd of boys.

一群孩子中那是我儿子。

There is a computer in the middle
of the room.

房间中间有台电脑。

In the center of
the hall stands a handsome man.

大厅中央站着个漂亮的小伙子。

Between
your mother and your father there is a gap.

你爸和你妈有代沟。

四者都用于表示“在……中间”，但是among表示“在多样事物之间”，in the middle of表示“在……（某物）中间”，in the center of表示“在……（某物）中央”，而between表示“在两者之间”，它亦可用于时间中。

e.g.: You can come here between
7 and 9.

你可以在七点到九点之间来。

（8）beside, besides, except

e.g.: There is a broom beside
the door.

门边有一个扫把。

Besides
Tom we want to go to the factory.

除汤姆外我们也想去工厂。

Except
Tom we want to go to the factory.

除汤姆外我们想去工厂。

beside表示“在……旁边”，besides和except都表示“除……外”，但是besides表示“除……外，还有”，而except表示“除……外，其余”。

（9）in, into

e.g.: The teacher is coming in
the classroom.

老师正进房间。

The teacher is coming into
the classroom.

老师正进入房间。

两者都用于表示“在……里面”，但是前者表示“进入”，而后者更侧重于方向性。in亦可表示“在……方向”或“用……（语言）”。

e.g.: You can speak in
English.

你可以说英语。

I do well in
drawing.

我擅长于绘画。

（10）to, towards

e.g.: He went to
the entrance.

他进了门。

He went towards
the entrance.

他进入了门里。

两者都用于表示“到”，但是前者表示“一般的到”，而后者更侧重于方向性。to亦可表示以下的意义。

①到。He goes to
Shanghai every week. 他每周都去上海。

②差（时间）。It is five to
six. 现在六点差五分。

③对。You are strict to
me. 你对我太严厉了。

（11）with, without

e.g.: Miss Li came with
a book.

李小姐带了一本书来。

Miss Li came without
a book.

李小姐没有带书来。

前者表示“和……在一起”，后者表示“除了；没有”。with亦可表示“用……（工具）”。

e.g.: I wrote a letter with
a blue pen.

我用蓝色的钢笔写信。

（12）下面将几个没有比较但较重要的介词列表如下。

表10-1　几个没有比较但较重要的介词

介词

意义

例句

against

靠着

对着

She is sitting against
the door. 她正对着门站着。

He is always against
US. 她一直反对美国。

along

沿着

If you go along
this street, you can find the building.

如果你沿着这条路走，你能找到大楼。

(a)round

在……周围

There are many goats around
the house.

房子的边上有许多羊。

as

作为

As
a chairman you can't do that. 作为一个主席你不该这样做。

at

在（几点）

在（位置）

I go to school at
8. 我八点上学。

We are arriving at
the bus stop. 我们要到车站了。

by

被……

以……为手段

在……旁边

The window is broken by
me. 窗户被我打坏了。

We go to Peking by
air. 我们坐飞机去北京。

There is a broom by
the door. 门边有把扫把。

for

去……（地方）

达到；共（时间）

赞成

She wanted to leave for
America. 她想去美国。

I have studied English for
3 years. 我学英语三年。

Are you for
or against?　你反对还是赞成？

from

来自……（地方）

离……（地方）

Where are you from
?　你来自哪儿？

The railway station is far away from
here.

火车站离这儿很远。

like

像

He is like
his father. 他像他爸。

of

表示属格

表示数量

This is a leg of
the desk. 这是桌子的一只腿。

This is a piece of
paper. 这是一张纸。

till/until

直……为止

I didn't go to bed until/till
3a.m.

我直到三点才睡觉。

小结：
本章介词比较简单，要把握几组重要介词的比较，而且要认真记忆单词表中的固定短语介词，这样学好介词也就容易了。那么，来试试下面的问题：

（1）介词on和about有何区别？

（2）介词above, on和over有何区别？

（3）介词under和below有何区别？

（4）介词before, in front of和in the front of有何区别？

（5）介词across和through有何区别？

（6）介词after, behind和at the back of有何区别?

（7）介词among, in the middle, in the center of和between有何区别？

（8）介词beside, besides和except有何区别？

（9）介词in和into有何区别？

（10）介词with, without有何区别？

（11）介词to和towards有何区别？

如果大家能把以上11组基本词汇的区别都弄懂的话，介词的学习就很成功了。

10.2　连词

1. 定义

连词是用来连接词与词、短语与短语、句子和句子的一类词。

2. 分类

按照连词本身的含义和连接的成分，可将连词分为并列连词和从属连词。

（1）并列连词

并列连词是用来连接平行的词语、短语和句子的一类连词，也就是并列句的连接词。

e.g.: Either
he or
I am a worker.

他是工人或我是工人。（either ... or ... 是并列连词，表示“要么……要么……”。）

It is hot today, but
I insist on doing morning exercise.

今天很热，但是我还坚持做早操。（but是并列连词，表示“但是”。）

（2）从属连词

从属连词是用来连接从句和主句的连词，也就是复合句的连接词。

e.g.: If
it rains tomorrow, we'll put off the sports meeting.

如果明天下雨，我们就延期运动会。（if是从属连词，表示“如果”。）

I got up so
late that
I couldn't catch the first train.

我起得太晚了以至于我赶不上第一趟火车了。（so ... that是从属连词，表示“太……以至于……”。）

3. 常用连词的用法（详见于第11章句法中）

小结：
在这里用很少的笔墨来阐述连词的用法，这也许是和其他语法书都不一样的地方，因为在语法结构学习的指导下，我们只要分清楚什么是并列连词和从属连词就可以了。其他的内容我们可以在以后句法的学习中再慢慢涉及。

到现在为止，我们用了十天左右的时间把英语中的词法全部讲完，可能大家认为花费的时间太多，实际上任何一个句子都是由词汇构成的，而且我们在讲授词法的过程中也不是在单独地讲述，而是放在各个句子当中的，所以词法和句法是相辅相成的。那么，下面我们就专门花上几天时间来讲述最后的句法。

10.3　基本句型知识点

Tips：

现在要开始学习句法了，这是英语语法中最后一大部分的语法现象，其中最重要的是定语从句的学习，其他的知识点按照本书所列的条目记下来即可。

1. 简单句

英语中句子按照结构可以分为简单句、并列句和复合句。在这里引进数学数列的办法来给大家说明一下：

（上面的s指的是主语，v指的是动词谓语，o指的是宾语，c指的是连词，C指的是修饰成分。）

来说明一下：

所谓简单句就是有n多个并列主语，n多个并列谓语和n多个并列宾语构成的一个句子。简化出来的结构就是一个大主语，一个大谓语和一个大宾语。

所谓并列句就是有n多个并列句子用n-1个连词连接起来的句子。这样的连词称之为并列连词。

所谓复合句就是在一个大句子中的某个成分上出现一个小句子，这个小句子称之为“从句”，在什么位置上出现从句就称为这个位置上的从句，所以就有了所谓的主语从句、宾语从句、表语从句和同位语从句等。

那么，简单句按照用途可以分为：陈述句、疑问句、祈使句和感叹句。

（1）陈述句

陈述句一般要求主语在前谓语之后，但有时谓语也置于主语之前（详见12.1），且要求主语的数形和谓语的数形保持一致（详见12.2）。句末用降调。

e.g.: I like swimming and dancing.

我喜欢游泳和跳舞。

He has not finished this subject yet.

他还没完成这个课题。

Here is a map of China.

这是一张中国地图。

There came a bus.

车来了。

（2）疑问句

①一般疑问句是针对某一情况是否存在而提出的，常用yes或no来回答，句末用升调。

e.g.: Are you a doctor?

你是医生吗？

Yes, I am. / No, I am not.

是的，我是医生。/不，我不是医生。

Did you want to have a look at her?

你是不想去看她？

Yes, I did. / No, I did not.

是的，我想去看她。/不，我不想去。

②特殊疑问句是以疑问代词和疑问副词位于句首，引起问句，不能用yes或no来回答，句末用降调。

e.g.: What is your name?

你叫什么名字？

My name is Xiaoli.

我的名字叫肖丽。

When did you leave for Tokyo?

你什么时候到的东京？

Last night.

昨天晚上。

Why did he ask this question?

他为什么问这个问题？

Sorry, I don not know.

对不起，我不知道。

③选择疑问句一般由两个答案共同组成，用or连接，一般不用yes或no来回答，回答在句中选择一个。or前部用升调，or后部用降调。

e.g.: Did you want to go on studying or start to work?

你想继续上学还是工作？

I wanted to go on studying.

我想继续上学。

Is he from America or
Australia?

他从美国来还是澳大利亚来？

He is from America.

他来自美国。

④反意疑问句一般用在陈述句之后，用逗号隔开，对提出的事实向对方进行证实。

e.g.: He is a nurse, isn't he
?

他是个护士，对吗？

There isn't a pig in the box, is there
?

盒子里没有猪，对吗？

反意疑问句的形式要遵循以下几个原则：

- 前句肯定，后句否定；前句否定，后句肯定。

- 前后动词形式一致。

- 前后人称，数形一致。

但有几种特殊情况要区别对待：

- I am a student, aren't I
?

I am not a student, am I
?

当前句出现I am ... 形式时，反意疑问句用aren't I。

- Everyone can do it, can't he
?

Anyone wants to be a successful, doesn't he
?

Everything can be done, cannot it
?

前句主语出现复合不定代词时，要用he和it来代替。

- They must have done this job, didn't they
?

He could have found the missing boy, didn't he
?

He must be a doctor, isn't he?

前句出现“情态动词+现在完成体”时，反意疑问句的动词形式用过去式。前句的情态动词如是表示推测的，反意疑问句的动词形式要与情态动词后的动词形式一致。

- a. I think she is a book-seller, isn't she
?

I don't think she is a book-seller, is she
?

b. She thinks she is a book-seller, doesn't she
?

a句中出现的I think，I don't think都可以认为是插入语，可以不管，直接看后面的主语和谓语动词（注意否定前移现象）。

b句中出现的是宾语从句，所以可以直接看主句的情况。

（3）祈使句

祈使句是用以表示说话的人的要求、命令等的一类句子，学习时要注意以下几点。

①祈使句始终为第二人称。

e.g.: Open the door. = You
open the door.

（你）开门。

Shut the window. = You
shut the window.

（你）关窗。

②祈使句否定时在句首加don't。

e.g.: Catch the bird.

抓住小鸟。

（否定：Don't catch the bird.）

Be careful!

当心！

（否定：Don't be careful!）

③祈使句的反意疑问句为will you。

e.g.: Let us go to the park, will you?

我们去公园，好吗？

（除Let's go to the park, shall we? 我们去公园，好吗？）

Pass me the sugar, will you?

给我糖，好吗？

④祈使句以动词原形开头，常用降调。

e.g.: Close your books.

合上你的书。

Give me a pen.

给我一支钢笔。

（4）感叹句

感叹句是用来表示说话的人的喜怒哀乐的一类句子。句末用感叹号，用降调，常用what和how引导。

①用what引导的感叹句

e.g.: What a beautiful lady she is!

多么漂亮的女士啊！

Tips：

本句是倒装句，正常语序为She is what a beautiful lady。在表语中前三者都是用来修饰lady，特别是what, a和beautiful是并列关系，所以what后接的中心词为名词或代词。

e.g.: What important information it is!

多么重要的信息呀！

Tips：

information是不可数名词，所以用零冠词。

②用how引导的感叹句

e.g.: How beautiful the lady is!

多么漂亮的女士啊！

Tips：

本句是倒装句，正常语序为The lady is how beautiful。在表语中how用来修饰beautiful，所以how后接的中心词为形容词、动词或副词。

e.g.: How fast he runs!

他跑得真快呀！

（5）there be句型

在英语中我们常用“there + be + 物体 + 地点”的结构来表示“某地有某物”。

e.g.: There is a desk in front of the classroom.

教室前有一张桌子。

There is a pine tree on the hill.

山上有棵松树。

它的否定式是在be动词前后加not。

e.g.: There isn't a desk in front of the classroom.

教室前没有桌子。

There isn't a pine tree on the hill.

山上没有松树。

它的一般疑问句是将be动词提到句首。

e.g.: Is there a desk in front of the classroom?

教室前有桌子吗？

Is there a pine tree on the hill?

山上有松树吗？

回答为：Yes, there is.

是的，有。

No, there isn't.

不是，没有。

2. 并列句

并列句是由并列连词将两个或两个以上的简单句连接起来的句子。常用的并列连词有：and, not only ... but also ... , or, but, so, for, either ... or ... , neither ... nor ...。

e.g.: She likes him and
he likes her. （and表示“和”）

她喜欢他，他也喜欢她。

Not only
did he say it, but also
he did it.

他不但说了而且做了。（not only ... but also ...表示“不但……而且……”）

Work hard, or
you'll fail the exam.

你要努力学习，否则考试不及格。（or表示“或者”）

He was very tired, but
he insisted on doing it.

虽然他很累，但是他还是坚持做这件事。（but表示“但是”）

It is rather urgent, so
everyone need know it.

因为这件事太紧急了，所大家想知道。（so表示“所以”）

The flowers here are dying, for
winter is coming.

这儿的花都死了，因为冬天到了。（for表示“因为”）

Either
you didn't do it or
he didn't do it.

要么你不做要么他不做。（either ... or ...表示“要么……要么……”）

Neither
he knew it nor
everyone knew it.

他不知道大家也不知道。（neither ... nor ...表示“既不……也不……”）

小结：
在介绍句法时，我们讲到了两个重要的句型——简单句和并列句。希望大家记住简单句中几种重要的功能性句型的用法和并列句中连词的意义和用法。那么，我们来看看这些问题大家能回答上来吗？

（1）疑问句可以分为几类？

（2）一般疑问句和特殊疑问句的特点分别是什么？

（3）附加疑问句的主要用法是什么？特殊用法是什么？

（4）感叹句的两个引导词分别怎么用？

（5）祈使句的四个特点是什么？

（6）There be句型的特点是什么？

大家一定要对以上的问题做到心中有数，这样就可以很好地把握住简单句和并列句的学习了。

介词练习

1. How are you getting _____ with your classmates?

A. at

B. in

C. on

D. out

2. _____ my surprise, he failed to pass the examination.

A. For

B. In

C. To

D. On

3. The enter _____ the theatre is too big.

A. for

B. to

C. at

D. into

4. Do you find the key _____ the question?

A. to

B. for

C. on

D. with

5. We were discussing the plan that we would like to put _____ practice in the future.

A. to

B. into

C. for

D. on

6. The fire had burnt half the forest _____ when it was put out.

A. over

B. alone

C. off

D. away

7. You should think _____ these questions that you are doing.

A. about

B. of

C. for

D. over

8. — Where is Alex?

— He is dancing _____ the music.

A. to

B. for

C. with

D. on

9. The girl _____ red is my sister.

A. on

B. with

C. for

D. in

10. I'll leave for America _____ October 10th.

A. in

B. at

C. about

D. on

11. People lived badly _____ the war.

A. during

B. on

C. in

D. over

12. I get up early _____ the morning.

A. on

B. at

C. in

D. during

13. I'll get there _____ two o'clock.

A. after

B. from

C. in

D. for

14. I spent two days walking _____ the forest.

A. over

B. across

C. out

D. through

15. I waited for a long time _____ the bus stop.

A. in

B. on

C. over

D. at

16. My grandmother often goes _____ the street to buy apples.

A. over

B. through

C. across

D. cross

17. The plan is flying _____ the bridge.

A. on

B. in

C. over

D. with

18. I'll arrive _____ Shanghai in two days.

A. at

B. in

C. on

D. to

19. — Who is knocking _____ the door?

— It must be Ricky.

A. at

B. on

C. over

D. with

20. I'll never give _____ my study.

A. up

B. in

C. off

D. at

21. We are proud _____ his courage.

A. of

B. to

C. at

D. in

22. It is hot indoors. You'd better _____ your coat.

A. put off

B. take off

C. put on

D. not to take off

23. I often listen to VOA _____ radio.

A. on

B. on the

C. through

D. by

24. Taiwan lies _____ the southeast of China.

A. to

B. on

C. at

D. in

25. Taiwan lies _____ the east of Fujian.

A. to

B. on

C. at

D. in

26. Japan lies _____ the east of China.

A. to

B. on

C. at

D. in

27. Shanghai is divided _____ two parts by Huangpu River.

A. by

B. with

C. into

D. of

28. Please wait for a moment. I'll change _____ a beautiful suit.

A. on

B. for

C. to

D. into

29. John stayed _____ making experiments till midnight.

A. away

B. on

C. up

D. with

30. The suit fitted him well _____ the color was a little bright.

A. except for

B. except that

C. expect when

D. besides

31. Put the sugar in the cupboard to prevent it safe _____ ants.

A. for

B. with

C. of

D. from

32. Please turn _____ the radio. It's too noisy.

A. up

B. down

C. off

D. on

33. — How can you get there?

— I'll _____ bus or _____ foot.

A. by; in

B. take; on

C. by; on

D. in; on

34. He threw the ball _____ the wall and it bounced back.

A. on

B. to

C. against

D. at

35. — Did you fly to London directly?

— No, I traveled from Taiwan _____ Paris.

A. through

B. by way of

C. by the way

D. in the way

36. — How many students in your classroom?

— Students reduce _____ forty.

A. by

B. on

C. below

D. to

37. Paper is made _____ wood while the machine is made _____ steel.

A. from; of

B. of; from

C. from; into

D. out; of

38. The old lady died _____ illness.

A. of

B. from

C. into

D. through

39. _____ the development of the economy, China is becoming stronger and stronger.

A. For

B. With

C. On

D. Through

40. Do you agree _____ what he just now said?

A. with

B. to

C. for

D. in

41. I spent two hundred dollars _____ my clothes.

A. in

B. on

C. about

D. with

42. The policeman caught the robber _____ the arm and struck him _____ the head.

A. on; in

B. on; on

C. on; by

D. by; on

43. I wish to thank him _____ helping me _____ math.

A. for; with

B. to; with

C. for; on

D. to; about

44. He is the cleverest one _____ three of us.

A. between

B. among

C. out

D. in

45. Mr. smith lives _____ 118 Oxford Street.

A. on

B. at

C. in

D. of

46. In summer, I often cool myself _____ the tree.

A. below

B. beneath

C. under

D. in

47. I was surprised _____ how he made so much money.

A. at

B. with

C. by

D. on

48. Apples are sold _____ pound.

A. by

B. with

C. in

D. on

49. He was stopped by police when he was driving _____ full speed.

A. in

B. for

C. with

D. at

50. — How do you know she loves you?

— I could tell _____ her eyes.

A. for

B. from

C. to

D. by

连词练习

1. Hurry up, _____ you will miss the last bus.

A. and

B. or

C. while

D. so

2. Work hard _____ you will be successful one day.

A. and

B. or

C. while

D. so

3. John is thick _____ his brother is very fat.

A. and

B. or

C. while

D. so

4. My bike is very old, _____, it was in wonderful condition.

A. so

B. however

C. for

D. while

5. It was raining, _____ the sports meeting was put off.

A. and

B. while

C. so

D. but

6. He learns not only Chinese _____.

A. but also learns English

B. but also English

C. or English

D. and English

7. He not only learns Chinese _____.

A. but also learns English

B. but also English

C. or English

D. and English

8. _____ your homework carefully, and some mistakes can certainly be avoided.

A. Having done

B. As far as you do

C. While doing

D. Do

9. It must have rained, _____ there was water in the street.

A. and

B. but

C. for

D. or

10. _____ my money back, or I'll charge you.

A. Give

B. Giving

C. To give

D. If you give

11. _____ your opinions are, you are welcomed to join our discussion.

A. Whatever

B. However

C. Whichever

D. Wherever

12. _____ Nick _____ Jenny like reading very much.

A. Neither; nor

B. Either; or

C. Both; and

D. Not only; but also

13. How long is it _____ you came to Shanghai?

A. after

B. since

C. until

D. till

14. _____ breaks the law shall be punished.

A. Those who

B. Who

C. Anyone

D. Whoever

15. Both Peter and Ricky, _____ Alex, are good at math.

A. as well as

B. well

C. as well

D. and as well

16. _____ she likes the skirt or not is not clear to me.

A. If

B. What

C. Which

D. Whether

17. My problem is _____ I should blame him right now.

A. if

B. whether

C. so

D. and

18. I'll phone you _____ I arrive in Beijing.

A. as soon as

B. so sooner

C. no sooner

D. no sooner than

19. _____ he got the message, he told me that.

A. The moment

B. Moment

C. The moment when

D. Whether

20. Hardly had I seen you _____ I recognized you.

A. than

B. before

C. as

D. when

21. No sooner had I arrived at the station _____ the train left.

A. before

B. as

C. than

D. when

22. The student was praised _____ helping the old.

A. from

B. as

C. for

D. because

23. You can't get into the meeting room _____ you have a special pass.

A. until

B. though

C. as large as

D. unless

24. We hope the laws to protect forests, _____ taken by the government, will succeed.

A. when

B. while

C. as

D. since

25. There was no news, _____, she did not give up hope.

A. moreover

B. therefore

C. but

D. nevertheless

26. It is not wise to give your child _____ he or she wants.

A. whichever

B. whenever

C. whatever

D. however

27. It was five o'clock in the morning _____ we climbed up to the top of Mountain Tai.

A. since

B. that

C. when

D. until

28. The weather was terrible, _____ the plane was delayed.

A. and

B. whether

C. or

D. so

29. — What should I do about it?

— Do it _____ I told you.

A. because

B. when

C. as

D. while

30. They are so alike _____ they were twins.

A. even though

B. as if

C. as

D. as long as

31. Terrorists will be defeated _____ all the countries in the world work together.

A. so

B. as soon as

C. as long as

D. until

32. I'll solve the problem _____ it is very difficult to me.

A. as if

B. even if

C. even

D. while

33. Beautiful girl _____ she is, no one likes her.

A. as if

B. as

C. while

D. even if

34. _____ a student, he works hard.

A. Because

B. As

C. As if

D. Except

35. Shut up and _____.

A. you do your work

B. have your work done

C. do your work

D. to do your work

36. — Would you like to have a dinner with me?

— I'd like to, _____ I'm very busy.

A. and

B. so

C. as

D. but

37. _____ you _____ I am to meet her at the railway station.

A. Both; and

B. Either; nor

C. Neither; or

D. Either; or

38. These houses are sold at such a low price _____ people expected.

A. like

B. as

C. that

D. which

39. _____ you are a disabled people, what would you do?

A. Supposing

B. As soon as

C. until

D. Except for

40. You should take an umbrella _____ it rains.

A. in case of

B. as if

C. in case

D. as far as

41. Speak loud _____ I can hear you.

A. since

B. so as to

C. because

D. so that

42. It is _____ that I take off my coat.

A. so warm today

B. such warm today

C. such a warm today

D. so a warm today

43. You must do your best to solve it _____ different it may be.

A. whichever

B. whatever

C. however

D. wherever

44. _____ you have been there for many years, I think you should know the environment clearly.

A. Since

B. Because of

C. Provided

D. Supposing

45. Seven minutes left, _____ you can caught the bus.

A. or

B. but

C. so

D. and

第十一天

突破英语的复合句

Tips：

句法中最重要的就是复合句，也就是我们经常提到的从句，实际上，从句和句子是有本质区别的，从句是句子的一个部分，在一个句子的什么位置出现句子就称之为什么从句。但是谓语的位置上是不可以有从句的。下面我们来看看主要从句的用法，特别要关注定语从句的用法，因为这是英语当中最后一个语法难点了，如果这个知识点可以突破，那么英语的语法学习就没有任何问题了！

11.1　主语从句

主语从句指在主语的位置不出现词或词组，而出现一个句子，这样的句子称为主语从句。

e.g.: What he said
is true.

他所说的是真的。

That he did so much
made everyone puzzled.

他做得这么多使每个人都感到惊讶。

（1）引导主语从句的词有：that, whether, who, what, which, when, where, how, why等。

e.g.: When and where we have this meeting
has not been decided.

我们举行会议的地点和时间还没有决定。

Whether he will come or not
was not very clear.

他是否来还不清楚。

Who had stolen the gun
has not been known.

谁偷了枪还不知道。

Which one will be our teacher
is a secret.

哪一个是我们老师是个秘密。

How we solve this problem
is very obvious.

怎么解决这个问题很明显。

Why he didn't kill her
has not been known.

为什么他要杀她还不知道。

（2）主语从句可以用it作为引导词来代替。

e.g.: It
is very clear that where and when we have this meeting.

我们什么时间和地点举行会议很清楚了。

It
is said that there are 300 people killed in the accident at least.

据说至少有300人死于这场车祸。

Tips：

在主语从句中that作为引导词时不可省略，无意义；其余引导词有意义，不可省略；疑问词引导从句时，从句用陈述句语序。

11.2　宾语从句

宾语从句指在宾语的位置不出现词或词组，而出现一个句子，这样的句子称为宾语从句。

e.g.: I suppose (that) her bag has been stolen
.

我想她的包已经被偷了。

Henry wanted to know if she will come
.

亨利想知道她是否来。

引导宾语从句的词有：that, whether, if, who, whom, whose, which, when, where, how, why等。

e.g.: Everybody doesn't know where the place is
.

每个人都不知道这是哪儿。

Henry wants to know when Bruce will come
.

亨利想知道布鲁斯什么时候来。

Sherry is studying how to use this machine
.

谢丽正在学习如何使用这台机器。

Tips：

这是“代词+不定式”作宾语从句的现象。

e.g.: The teacher asked me why I was late
.

老师问我为什么迟到。

Bruce showed which one is better
.

布鲁斯展示哪一个更好。

Let's see whose shirt it is
.

让我们看看这是谁的衬衫。

I know who did it
.

我知道谁做的。

Tips：

宾语从句中的that作为引导词时可省略，无意义；其余引导词有意义，不可省略；疑问词引导从句时，从句用陈述句语序。

e.g.: I think (that) we will land on the moon one day
.

我想我们总有一天会登上月球。

过去将来时、过去完成时、过去进行时常用于宾语从句中。

e.g.: I said I would go to Shanghai next day
.

我说我明天去上海。（过去将来时）

He told me that he had finished this job
.

他告诉我他已经完成了这项工作。（过去完成时）

She said she was doing the housework at the same time last day
.

她说昨天这个时候她正在做家务。（过去进行时）

11.3　表语从句

表语从句指在表语的位置不出现词或词组，而出现一个句子，这样的句子称为表语从句。

e.g.: That is why he was late
.

那就是为什么他迟到了。

It's how we solve this problem
.

这就是我们如何解决问题的。

引导表语从句的词有：that, whether, if, who, what, which, when, where, how, why等。

e.g.: The difficulty is that we couldn't speak French
.

困难是我们不懂法语。

The question is whether (if) they will come
.

问题是他们会不会来。

The problem is who will take over this subject
.

问题是谁来接管这个项目。

That's what we are anxious to
.

那是我们着急的事情。

The suggestion is which one go to American is better
.

建议是哪一个去美国更好。

The last question is when and where we will hold the competition
.

最后一个问题是我们何时何地举行竞赛。

The problem is how to solve the affair
.

问题是怎么解决这个事件。

Tips：

在表语从句中that作为引导词时不可省略，无意义；其余引导词有意义，不可省略；疑问词引导从句时，从句用陈述句语序。

11.4　同位语从句

同位语指的是前后两个名词或是名词短语相互说明，不分前后，不分主次。

e.g.: Beijing, the capital of China, is a very beautiful city.

北京是中国的首都，也是一个很漂亮的城市。

句中Beijing和the capital of China就是同位语关系，他们是相互说明的关系，而且前后位置可以互换。

同位语从句指在同位语的位置不出现词或词组，而出现一个句子，这样的句子称为同位语从句。它一般在（face, idea, news, way, promise等）后面，用于解释前面名词。

e.g.: The fact that he broken the window
has been proved.

他打破玻璃的事实已经证实了。

引导同位语从句的词有：that，how，when，where等。

e.g.: He had no idea when and where she was dead
.

他不知道她是何时何地死的。

The way how we cope with this thing
has been not very clear.

怎么解决这个问题的方法我们还不清楚。

Tips：

在同位语从句中，that作为引导词时不可省略，无意义；其余引导词有意义，不可省略；疑问词引导从句时，从句用陈述句语序。

在以上所提到的4种从句都可以称之为名词性从句，因为他们在句子中作的成分都是名词来充当的，但是在英语中还有两类更加重要的从句，就是形容词性的定语从句和副词性的状语从句。

11.5　定语从句

Tips：

这是英语中最重要的语法现象之一。中文中也有定语，也有定语从句，比方说：“美丽的祖国”，这就是“定语加中心词”的用法；“我生活的祖国”，这就是“定语从句加中心词”的用法，但是中文的定语从句和英语的是不一样的，一般来说，中文的定语从句在修饰词的前面，英语在被修饰词的后面。

（1）定义：用来做定语的句子称为定语从句。

e.g.: The man whom you are talking with
is my brother.

你正在说话的人是我兄弟。

（2）几个重要概念。

（3）关系词的用法。

①who用于指人，在句中做主语。

e.g.: The woman who is wearing a red coat
is my mother.

穿红毛衣的是我妈。

The girl who is standing under the tree
is my daughter.

站在树下的女孩是我女儿。

②whom用于指人，在句中做宾语。在口语中可省略，可以用who来代替。

e.g.: That man whom (who) you were beating
is dying.

你刚刚打的男人要死了。

The woman whom (who) you talked to just now
was a thief.

刚刚跟你讲话的女人是个小偷。

③whose用于指人，在句中做定语。

e.g.: Henry whose mother is a physician
has gone abroad.

妈妈是内科医生的亨利已经出国了。

Bruce whose brother is a famous scientist
wanted to be a doctor.

兄弟是著名科学家的布鲁斯想成为一个医生。

④which用于指物，在句中做主语或宾语。

e.g.: The radio (which) you wanted to buy
is sold.

你想买的收音机已经卖了。

The house (which) you lived in
was destroyed by a terrible earthquake.

你住的房子在地震中毁坏了。

The element which made you upset
was dismissed.

使你紧张的原因消失了。

Tips：

当which引导物在定语从句中做宾语的时候是可以省略的，所以上面的带有括号的which都是可以省略的。

⑤that用于指人，也可以指物，在句中做主语或宾语，作宾语时可省略。

e.g.: The mobile phone (that) you bought
is of no use.

你买的手机没有用。

This kind of deer that lived in China
has decreased.

生活在中国的这种鹿已经减少。

Who is that boy that is fishing now
?

正在钓鱼的男孩是谁？

⑥when用于指时间，在句中作状语。

Tips：

lived 为不及物动词，所以先行词作状语用when，而spend为及物动词，先行词作宾语，用which。

⑦where用于指地点，在句中作状语。

Tips：

lived为不及物动词，所以先行词作状语，用where，而lived in是及物动词词组，所以先行词用which 实际上in which相当于where。

⑧why用于指原因，在句中作状语，前面先行词一般为 reason。

e.g.: That's the reason why I wanted to join the army
.

那是我参军的原因。

Who told you the reason why they didn't want to come here
?

谁告诉你他们不想来这儿的原因？

（4）that（“不止最两序”）和which（非介）用法比较。

Tips：

这是定语从句中最重要的内容，记住本书中讲到的这几种用法，只有几个字。

①which用于非限定性定语从句中。

e.g.: He said he was busy, which was not true
.

他说他很忙，那是假的。

We don't want to enter the house, which is very cold
.

我们不想进房间，因为太冷了。

②which用于介词后做宾语。

e.g.: The room of which windows are opposite to the sea
is large.

窗户正对着海的房间很大。

The chair in which you are sitting
is made of iron.

你坐的椅子是用铁做的。

③that一定用于“不”（不定代词作先行词时）、“止”（“只是”only修饰先行词时）、“最”（形容词最高级修饰先行词时）、“两”（先行词同时出现人和物）和“序”（序数词修饰先行词时）5种情况。

e.g.: All that you need
is help.

你所需要的是帮助。（all为不定代词。）

A lot of things and children that are full of the car
were lost in the district.

装满了车的东西和孩子们在这个地区失踪了。（先行词既有人又有物。）

That is only thing that I want to know
.

那是我唯一想知道的事情。（先行词有only修饰。）

The last book that you bought
is that I wanted to buy.

你买的最后一本书是我想买的。（先行词有序数词修饰。）

What is the size of the largest map that you have seen before
?

你以前见过的最大尺寸的地图有多大？（先行词有形容词最高级修饰。）

（5）定语从句的种类。

定语从句可分为非限定性定语从句（描绘性定语从句）和限定性定语从句。

e.g.: They don't like that person who is noisy
.

他们不喜欢那个吵闹的人。

Tips：

限定性定语从句和先行词关系紧密，不可省略。

e.g.: They don't like that people, who is noise
.

他们不喜欢那个人，因为他太吵闹了。

Tips：

非限定性定语从句（描绘性定语从句）和先行词关系疏松，用逗号和主句隔开，可以省略。它翻译时，相当于一个状语从句。

11.6　状语从句

状语从句指在状语的位置不出现词或词组，而出现一个句子，这样的句子称为状语从句。

（1）时间和条件状语从句（用一般时代替将来时）

e.g.: If it rains tomorrow, we will put off the sports meeting.

如果明天下雨，我们就延迟运动会。

Tips：

在if引导的条件句中，应用rains（一般现在时）代替will rain（一般将来时）。

e.g.: As soon as she comes to home, I will ask her to call you.

她一到家我就让她打电话给你。

Tips：

在as soon as引导的时间句中，应用come（一般现在时）代替will come（一般将来时）。

When he goes to the theatre, the film will start.

当他到电影院时，电影开始了。

Unless I die I will struggle with you forever.

除非我死了我会和你斗争到底。

（2）原因状语从句，它常由because, as, since来引导

e.g.: I can't go to school because I caught a terrible cold
.

我不能去上学，因为我得了严重的感冒。

We could do whatever we like since they didn't care for us
.

既然他们不喜欢我们，我们可以做任何想做的事情。

As he was old
, he can't lift the stone.

因为他年纪大了，所以他举不起这块石头。

Tips：

在原因状语从句中so不可和because同时出现，记住“有因为没有所以；有所以没有因为”。它们的使用方法和中文不同。

（3）让步状语从句，它常用although, though和even if来引导

e.g.: Although she was too old
, she still did well in drawing.

尽管她年纪很大了，但还是很擅长绘画。

It is cold although /though it is still fall
.

尽管还是秋天，但是天气很冷了。

Tips：

在原因状语从句中although/though不可和but同时出现，记住“有虽然没有但是；有但是没有虽然”。它们的使用方法和中文不同。

（4）比较状语从句（详见于“形容词和副词的比较等级”一节）

（5）结果状语从句和目的状语从句

e.g.: Bruce got up so late that he could not catch the first train.

布鲁斯起得太晚了以至于没有赶上头班火车。（so ... that表示“太……以至于”，结果状语。)

Bruce got up early so that he could catch the first train.

布鲁斯起得这么早就为了赶上头班火车。（so that表示“为了……”，目的状语。)

结果状语的连接词还有：so ... as to, in order ... that, in order to等。

Tips：

so ... as to和in order to后接不定式，而in order ... that后接句子。

目的状语的连接词还有：so as to, in order that, in order to等。

Tips：

so as to和in order to后接不定式，而in order that后接句子。

（6）方式状语从句，它常由as if/though来引导。

e.g.: He looks as if he's very happy
.

他看上去很高兴。

It looks as though it is going to rain
.

要下雨了。

（7）地点状语从句，它常由where和wherever来引导。

e.g.: Put it where it was
.

把它放在原来的地方。

You could go wherever you like
.

你可以去你任何想去的地方。

Tips：

定语从句中where作定语时的区别，详见定语从句。

Put it where it was.

Put it in which where it was.

Put it in the place where it was.

Put it in the place in which it was.

第一句正确，是地点状语从句。第二句是错误的，因为定语从句需要先行词，而此句中没有。第三句正确，这是用where引导的表示地点的定语从句。第四句是正确的，因为在定语从句在某些场合下，where和in which是可以互换的。

所以要判断地点状语从句和定语从句要看引导词前是否有名词，如果有先行词就是定语从句，没有的话就是状语从句。

小结：
在本章中，我们讨论了复合句。大家要掌握各种从句的用法，引导词的使用情况（特别是要把重点放在定语从句上）。在学完本章后，语法的学习也要进入尾声了，下面几个语法点只要了解就可以了，把握住小结中所提到的要点，记住它们即可。那么还是请大家看看一些问题：

（1）什么从句中的that可以省略？

（2）主语从句中用it代替的用法是怎样的？

（3）表语从句中可不可以用疑问词来连接？

（4）什么是同位语？同位语从句的先行词一般有哪些？

（5）定语从句主要引导词的用法是什么？

（6）在定语从句中，that和which的用法区别是什么？

（7）非限定性定语从句和限定性定语从句的区别是什么？

（8）八大状语从句分别是什么？区别和联系是什么？

大家一定要多花点时间把以上的问题一一弄清楚，这样就可以把复合句的所有内容都弄懂了。努力吧！

练习

1. — She is your teacher, isn't she?

— _____.

A. Yes, she isn't

B. Yes, she is

C. No, she is

D. No, she isn't

2. Let's do a game, _____?

A. will you

B. shall I

C. shall we

D. don't we

3. Let us do a game, _____?

A. will you

B. shall I

C. shall we

D. don't we

4. Don't be noisy, _____?

A. is you

B. shall I

C. shall we

D. will you

5. Pass me the salt, _____?

A. don't you

B. don't I

C. shall I

D. will you

6. Everything is not easy, _____?

A. isn't it

B. is it

C. is everything

D. isn't everything

7. Everybody wants to become white collar, _____?

A. don't it

B. do they

C. doesn't he

D. don't he

8. I am a teacher, _____?

A. am I

B. am not I

C. are I

D. aren't I

9. She seldom goes shopping, _____?

A. does she

B. doesn't she

C. will she

D. shall she

10. You'd like to attend the meeting, _____?

A. won't you

B. wouldn't you

C. hadn't you

D. haven't you

11. I had to tell the truth, _____?

A. haven't I

B. wouldn't I

C. didn't I

D. shouldn't I

12. — Isn't your uncle an engineer?

— _____.

A. No, he isn't

B. No, he is

C. Yes, he isn't

D. Yes, he does

13. — You’ve not a new member, are you?

— _____. I joined only yesterday.

A. No, I'm not

B. Yes, I'm not

C. No, I am

D. Yes, I am

14. I can't speak Japanese, _____?

A. can't I

B. can I

C. will I

D. shall I

15. He used to live in New York, _____?

A. did he

B. used he

C. didn't he

D. doesn't he

16. The boy ought to be punished, _____?

A. ought to he

B. should he

C. ought not he

D. ought not to he

17. You need to study English, _____?

A. needn't you

B. need you

C. don't you

D. do you

18. I needn't study English, _____?

A. need I

B. do I

C. don't I

D. needn't I

19. Nobody dares to tell him the bad news, _____?

A. does he

B. don't he

C. daren't he

D. dare he

20. Nobody dare tell him the bad news, _____?

A. does he

B. don't he

C. daren't he

D. dare he

21. You must be excited, _____?

A. mustn't you

B. aren't you

C. needn't you

D. will you

22. You must clean the classroom right now, _____?

A. mustn't you

B. don't you

C. needn't you

D. will you

23. You must have drunk too much, _____?

A. mustn't you

B. haven't you

C. didn't you

D. will you

24. No one was injured in the accident, _____?

A. weren't they

B. were they

C. won't it

D. was it

25. I don't think she is a good doctor, _____?

A. do I

B. isn't she

C. is she

D. do I

26. She doesn't believe she can do it by herself, _____?

A. does she

B. can she

C. can't she

D. do I

27. John is hardly twenty years old, _____?

A. isn't he

B. is he

C. does he

D. doesn't he

28. She told me that Peter could manage it, _____?

A. couldn't he

B. did she

C. didn't she

D. could he

29. You'd better go, _____?

A. hadn't you

B. had you

C. wouldn't you

D. would you

30. He may bring my books, _____?

A. mayn't he

B. mustn't he

C. can I

D. will I

31. How beautiful the flower he gave me is, _____?

A. did he

B. didn't he

C. is it

D. isn't it

32. I wish you to succeed, _____?

A. may I

B. don't I

C. shall I

D. will I

33. _____ from Beijing to London!

A. How long way it is

B. What a long way is it

C. How long way is it

D. What a long way it is

34. _____ happy life they are living!

A. How

B. What

C. How a

D. What a

35. _____ wonderful weather they are having!

A. How

B. What

C. How a

D. What a

36. _____ careless he is !

A. What

B. How

C. How a

D. How much

37. _____ beautiful the flower is!

A. How a

B. What a

C. How

D. What

38. _____ she gave me!

A. What good advice

B. How good advice

C. What a good advice

D. How good advice

39. _____ he is!

A. How funny

B. What funny

C. What a fun

D. How a fun

40. _____ handsome he is!

A. What

B. How

C. What a

D. How a

41. _____ handsome boy he is!

A. What

B. How an

C. What a

D. How a

42. _____ she speaks Japanese!

A. How fluent

B. How fluently

C. What fluent

D. What fluently

43. Look at the children over there! What _____?

A. do they do

B. are they doing

C. they are doing

D. is he doing

44. — How is your father?

— _____.

A. He's fine, thank you

B. He is only fifty

C. He is a doctor

D. He likes football very much

45. — What does your father do?

— _____.

A. He's fine, thank you

B. He is only fifty

C. He is a doctor

D. He likes football very much

46. — _____ do you go to see your father?

— Once a week.

A. How often

B. How long

C. How soon

D. What about

47. — _____ have you learned English?

— Six years.

A. How long

B. How long time

C. How much time

D. How much long

48. — ____ will you finish your task?

— I'll finish it in two days.

A. How long

B. How soon

C. How often

D. How much

49. — What is the date today?

— It is _____.

A. April 17th

B. Thursday

C. a terrible day

D. the day for me to travel

50. — What's day today?

— It is _____.

A. April 17th

B. Thursday

C. a terrible day

D. the day for me to travel

51. The man _____ talked to you just now is an engineer.

A. who

B. which

C. where

D. when

52. I still remember the days _____ we studied together.

A. that

B. which

C. where

D. when

53. The ancient people used stone to build a house in _____ they stored food.

A. who

B. that

C. which

D. what

54. He is the cleverest boy _____ I have known.

A. who

B. that

C. which

D. whom

55. The book, the cover of _____ is white, is mine.

A. that

B. where

C. which

D. it

56. The book, and the cover of _____ is white, is mine.

A. that

B. where

C. which

D. it

57. She is one of the students who _____ the examinations.

A. passes

B. pass

C. have passed

D. has passed

58. She is only one of the students who _____ the examinations.

A. passes

B. pass

C. have passed

D. has passed

59. There are fifty students in our class, _____ are girls.

A. most of them

B. most of whom

C. most of who

D. and most of whom

60. I live in a house _____ windows are painted red.

A. that

B. which

C. who

D. of which

61. All _____ glitters is not gold.

A. which

B. that

C. who

D. what

62. Hong Qi is the best car _____ is made in China.

A. which

B. that

C. and which

D. what

63. This is the first film _____ I’ve ever seen.

A. that

B. which

C. and which

D. what

64. _____ is well known to all, the earth is becoming warmer.

A. That

B. Which

C. What

D. As

65. He is always late, _____ annoys me.

A. what

B. that

C. which

D. who

66. The reason _____ America wants to disarm Iraq is for oil.

A. that

B. which

C. why

D. on which

67. She is the only girl _____ has ever seen the chief.

A. whom

B. that

C. which

D. she

68. The doctor _____ is leaving for Africa next month.

A. the nurse is talking to him

B. whom the nurse is talking

C. the nurse is talking to

D. who the nurse is talking

69. After living in Pairs for fifty years, he returns to the small town _____ he grew up as a child.

A. which

B. where

C. that

D. when

70. They talked of the things and classmates _____ they remembered in the school.

A. which

B. that

C. who

D. they

71. I have the same book _____ you do.

A. that

B. which

C. who

D. as

72. Edison is one of the greatest scientists _____ ever lived.

A. that

B. who

C. whom

D. about whom

73. Fortunately we had a compass, without _____ we would have got lost.

A. which

B. it

C. that

D. what

74. John got high marks, _____ had been expected.

A. who

B. what

C. that

D. as

75. David lost his money, _____ made him very sad.

A. this

B. which

C. as

D. that

76. I still remember the day _____ I met you.

A. on that

B. on which

C. in which

D. on when

77. I have two books, _____ is interesting.

A. neither of them

B. neither of which

C. none of them

D. none of which

78. World War Ⅱ _____ millions of people were killed ended in 1945.

A. that

B. which

C. during

D. in which

79. It was midnight, there wasn't a person _____ I should turn for help.

A. who

B. whom

C. to whom

D. what

80. The knife _____ we use to cut the apples is every sharp.

A. what

B. with that

C. with it

D. which

81. Is there anything _____ to you?

A. that belong

B. which belongs

C. that belongs

D. that is belonged

82. — Why were you late yesterday?

— The reason is _____ I was ill yesterday.

A. because

B. as

C. that

D. why

83. This is the factory _____ I visited last year.

A. which

B. where

C. that

D. why

84. This is the restaurant _____ I had dinner yesterday.

A. which

B. where

C. in where

D. that

85. It was in 1991 _____ Changjiang River flooded.

A. that

B. in which

C. when

D. in that

86. It was the teacher _____ I respected very much.

A. who

B. that

C. which

D. with whom

87. October the first is the day _____ we Chinese people will never forget.

A. which

B. when

C. on which

D. on that

88. The house _____ we live is new.

A. which

B. in which

C. that

D. in that

89. There are three labs, the longest one _____ was built 20 years ago.

A. which

B. /

C. of which

D. who are

90. I, _____ your good friend, try my best to help you out.

A. who is

B. who am

C. that am

D. who are

91. This factory is _____ you have visited before.

A. that

B. which

C. where

D. the one

92. The Swedish people did not understand the three questions _____ were asked in French.

A. where

B. who

C. in which

D. which

93. He didn't know which room _____.

A. they lived

B. they lived in

C. did they live

D. did they live in

94. The book _____ sold out in the bookstore.

A. which you need it

B. what you needed

C. which you need it

D. you needed

95. Is this the shop _____ sells men's clothes?

A. which

B. where

C. in which

D. what

96. The clothes _____ Ricky paid 100 dollars was very beautiful.

A. that

B. which

C. for which

D. to which

97. His wife, _____ you met on the street, was a doctor.

A. who

B. whom

C. which

D. that

98. The window _____ glass was broken faces south.

A. whose

B. that

C. of which

D. where

99. _____ the day went on, the weather got worse.

A. With

B. Since

C. Which

D. As

100. _____ he said is true.

A. Whether

B. That

C. Which

D. What

101. We know the fact _____ she is a chief.

A. that

B. which

C. of which

D. what

102. No one doubts the theory _____ light travels than sound.

A. which

B. that

C. what

D. about which

103. The problem _____ has happened is not known to me.

A. that

B. what

C. whether

D. if

104. The question _____ there are living things in space will be found out.

A. that

B. what

C. whether

D. if

105. I have no idea _____ I'll leave for Shanghai.

A. that

B. whether

C. what

D. when

106. I have no idea _____ I'll go for coming vacation.

A. that

B. whether

C. where

D. when

107. There is no doubt _____ Newton is a great scientist.

A. that

B. which

C. what

D. why

108. My father made a promise _____ he would buy me a watch.

A. what

B. when

C. that

D. which

109. _____ he was elected as president was beyond me.

A. That

B. Whether

C. How

D. What

110. _____ you have done might do harm to other people.

A. That

B. What

C. Which

D. This

111. It was doubtful _____ we would make it or not.

A. what

B. that

C. whether

D. if

112. _____ she is the most intelligent girl is known to everybody.

A. /

B. That

C. What

D. As

113. It looks _____ it is going to rain.

A. that

B. as if

C. what

D. whether

114. The water is _____ we want.

A. that

B. which

C. what

D. whether

115. What she wants to tell you is _____ the meeting will begin.

A. when

B. what

C. that

D. whether

116. Everything depends on _____ you have confidence.

A. as if

B. what

C. that

D. whether

117. Nobody believed him _____ what he said.

A. even though

B. in spite

C. no matter

D. contrary to

118. They want to know _____ do to help us.

A. what can they

B. what they can

C. how they can

D. how can they

119. _____ there is a will, there is a way.

A. When

B. That

C. While

D. Where

120. Speak slowly and clearly _____ everyone could understand you.

A. for

B. since

C. because of

D. so that

121. John gives me more help than _____.

A. Tom is

B. Tom has

C. Tom does

D. Tom gives

122. We all agreed that he was stronger than _____.

A. I looked

B. I was looked

C. he looked

D. he was looked

123. Bright _____ the sun is, it is very cold.

A. if

B. because

C. as

D. since

124. He doesn't know _____ to stay or not.

A. whether

B. if

C. either

D. if he will

125. _____ you are, I'll be missing you.

A. Where

B. Wherever

C. Whether

D. Who

126. _____ Jack finishes his homework, he will leave at once.

A. As soon as

B. As if

C. Unless

D. In order that

127. Go and get your coat. It's _____ you left it.

A. there

B. where

C. there where

D. where there

128. It was only two hours _____ I arrived in New York.

A. after

B. that

C. when

D. till

129. It worried her a bit _____ her hair was turning gray.

A. while

B. that

C. if

D. for

130. I didn't manage to do it _____ you had explained how.

A. until

B. unless

C. when

D. before

131. We must get up early tomorrow, _____ we'll miss the first bus to the Great Wall.

A. so

B. or

C. but

D. however

132. You may take an umbrella _____ it'll rain.

A. in case

B. in case of

C. in order to

D. in order that

133. _____ he won't go with us, let's go.

A. For

B. Because

C. Now that

D. That

134. _____ what will happen, I'll persist in my belief.

A. Even if

B. Although

C. Perhaps

D. No matter

135. Jack was a very kind man. He helped me _____ I asked him to.

A. whatever

B. whenever

C. only

D. however

136. Jenny is _____ girl that we all like her.

A. a pretty so

B. so pretty a

C. a such pretty

D. such pretty a

137. It has been six years _____ I started to learn English.

A. before

B. after

C. since

D. that

138. _____ he worked very hard, he failed again.

A. Whether

B. Although

C. Because

D. Since

139. _____ book you borrow, you must return it in two weeks.

A. However

B. Whenever

C. Whichever

D. Wherever

140. — How can I do it?

— You should do _____ I told you.

A. what

B. so

C. as

D. as if

141. There was no news, _____, she did not give up hope.

A. moreover

B. therefore

C. but

D. nevertheless

142. The men will have to wait all day _____ the doctor works faster.

A. if

B. unless

C. whether

D. that

143. I shall stay in the hotel all day _____ there is some news about the missing child.

A. in case

B. no matter

C. in any case

D. ever since

第十二天

突破英语的语序、主谓一致和it的用法

Tips：

在最后一天，我们要把英语中最后三个语法现象拿出来和大家一起讨论，虽然这三个语法现象并不是十分重要，但是在英语中却很常见，希望能够引起大家足够的重视。

12.1　语序

1. 定义

语序是用来表示句子中主谓和宾语之间位置关系的一种语法现象。

Tips：

一般来说，在讨论语序的时候，很少讨论宾语前置的情况，只讨论主谓倒装的问题，所以我们在这里也是按照常规的方法来讲解，遇到个别宾语前置的情况也会给大家讲解。

2. 分类

（1）自然语序：主语在前，谓语在后的一种语序。

e.g.: We love peace.

我们热爱和平。

That apple tree is so big.

那棵苹果树太大了。

（2）倒装语序：谓语提到主语前面的语序。

①谓语部分完全置于主语之前的语序，称为完全倒装。

e.g.: There came a bus.

来了一辆汽车。

Here is a map of China.

这是一张中国地图。

Tips：

在这里可以看到当有某些词在句首的时候，会引起倒装。

②谓语部分中的助动词提到主语之前，而实义动词的位置不变的语序，称为部分倒装。

e.g.: How did you like the show?

你觉得演出如何？

When do you come to China?

你什么时候来中国？

3. 常见的倒装形式

（1）由引导词there引起的完全倒装。

e.g.: There are
three desks in the classroom.

教室里有三张桌子。

There is
a pear in the box.

盒子里有个梨子。

Tips：

很少讲there be句型是一种倒装形式，但是在某种程度上，there be句型中的there就是一个引导词，并没有任何含义，只是引起了be动词的前置而产生的倒装。

（2）由时间状语（now和then等）或地点状语（there，here，up，down等）位于句首引起的完全倒装。

e.g.: Here
is a dog.

这是一条狗。

At the top of the hill
stands a pine tree.

山顶上有棵松树。

Now
comes your turn.

现在轮到你。

（3）由so，neither，either位于句首引起的完全倒装。

e.g.: You can swim. So can I
.

你会游泳，我也会。

The first one is not good. Neither is the last one
.

第一个不好，最后一个也不好。

I can't swim. Nor can you
.

我不会游泳，你也不会。

（4）由分词短语位于句首引起的完全倒装。

e.g.: Standing by the table was a beautiful lady.

桌子边站了一位漂亮的女士。

Sitting in a chair is a fox.

椅子上坐了一只狐狸。

（5）在直接引语中出现的完全倒装。

e.g.: “I love you!” said she
.

她说：“我爱你！”

“Don't you know it?” cried your wife
.

你老婆叫到：“难道你不知道吗？”

（6）某些否定副词（never, seldom, nowhere等），否定短语（no sooner ... than, hardly ... when, scarcely ... when, not only ... but also等）位于句首引起部分倒装。

e.g.: Never
does he realize how important the meeting is.

他根本不知道会议的重要。

Hardly
had she gone out when it began to rain.

当她准备出门时开始下雨了。

Not only
does she speak English very well, but also
she speaks Japanese very fluently.

她不但英语说得很好，而且日语也说得很流利。

（7）在疑问句中引起的倒装。

①一般疑问句引起的部分倒装。

e.g.: Did he have a cold?

他感冒了？

Is she a student?

她是个学生吗？

②特殊疑问句引起的完全倒装。

e.g.: Where is she going?

她打算去哪儿？

What did you say?

你说什么来着？

小结：
在本节中大家主要记忆各种倒装的情况。特别是要注意部分倒装这一部分，它不是直接将谓语提到主语之前，而是将谓语部分中的助动词部分提到主语之前。

请回答下列问题：

1. 倒装指的是什么？

2. 部分倒装和完全倒装又有什么样的不同？

3. 完全倒装一般有几种形式？

4. 部分倒装总的特点是什么？

如果这些问题都可以回答的话，那么说明这节大家掌握的已经很好了。

12.2　主谓一致

Tips：

在这一小节当中，主要讨论的是主语和谓语的数形问题。在名词一章中讨论过名词的数，但是现在已经很少看到有关名词形的说法了，大家只要记住名词的后面有s的单词都称为复形单词。

1. 定义

主谓一致是指主语的数和形和谓语的数和形保持一致的一种语法现象。

e.g.: They are workers.

他们是工人。

I have a bag.

我有一个包。

He is a teacher.

他是位老师。

Tips：

bag为单数，单形；bags为复数，复形。

2. 主语的数形和谓语的数形的几种特殊情况

（1）单形词表示复数概念。

在英语中，people, cattle, police三个词的谓语部分始终用复数。

e.g.: The people are having breakfast.

这些人正在吃早饭。

The cattle are female.

这些牛是母的。

The police have already caught the thief.

警方已经抓住了小偷。

（2）复形词表示单数概念。

①以-ics结尾的学科要用单数谓语（physics, politics, etc.）。

e.g.: Linguistics is a difficult subject.

语言学是一门很难的学科。

I like studying politics.

我喜欢学习政治。

②news和means后要用单数谓语。

e.g.: This is a piece of surprising news.

这是一条令人震惊的消息。

It is a quick means to get to Peking.

这是去北京的捷径。

③货币和度量衡后要用单数谓语。

e.g.: Three hundred dollars is a large sum.

三百美元是笔大数目。

Four meters has been very high.

四米已经很高了。

（3）整体原则（以and和both ... and ... 连接的词或词组后用复数谓语）。

e.g.: You and I are teachers.

你和我都是老师。

Both his brother and his father are drivers.

他兄弟和他父亲都是司机。

（4）就近原则（以either ... or ..., neither ... nor ...和there be句型连接的词或词组后接谓语，要与后一个主语的数形一致）。

e.g.: Either boys or girls are doing their homework.

要么男孩做作业，要么女孩做作业。

Neither he nor you are a student.

他和你都不是学生。

There is an apple and a pear on the desk.

桌子上有一个苹果和一个梨子。

There are six pupils and a dog in the room.

房间里有六个小学生和一条狗。

（5）不管原则（以with，as well as，along with和together with连接的词或词组后接谓语，要与第一个主语的数形一致）。

e.g.: He, with three students, attends the significant meeting.

他和三个学生参加了会议。

Bruce, as well as Henry, has gone to Shanghai.

布鲁斯和亨利已经去了上海。

（6）非谓语动词做主语时，后接单数谓语。

e.g.: Doing morning exercise is good for your health.

做早操有利于身体健康。

To know these conditions is very useful.

知道这些情况很有用。

（7）集体名词的数（详见于“名词的数”一节）。

（8）数式做主语时，谓语既可用单数，又可用复数。

e.g.: 1 + 1 = 2 One and one is (are) two.

3×2 = 6 Three times two is (are) six.

（9）不定代词someone, somebody, something, everyone, everybody, everything, no one, nobody, nothing, anyone, anybody, anything, the other, each等做主语时后接单数谓语。

e.g.: Is everyone here?

每个人都在吗？

The other is red.

另一个是红的。

Anyone needs to have a lot of water every day.

任何人每天都要喝大量的水。

小结：
本节的难点是各种主谓一致的特殊情况。大家特别要对三原则（整体原则、就近原则、不管原则）仔细阅读，这在各种考试中出现的频率很高。

请回答下列问题：

（1）复形表示单数的词汇有哪些？

（2）单形表示复数的词汇有哪些？

（3）整体原则、就近原则、不管原则又是哪些？

这几个问题将使大家对主谓一致有全面的认识，希望大家能认真回答。

12.3　it的用法

Tips：

英语中最难的两个代词分别是it和that，在本书的最后一节中，不用很长的篇幅来说明其用法，只是将其最常见的用法罗列出来供大家参考。

（1）it一般指物不指人。

e.g.: It
is a car, isn't it?

那是一辆车，是吗？

It
has happened before.

事情已经发生过了。

但是it可以指婴儿（低等生命）或不明确是谁。

e.g.: My sister has a baby. It
is very lovely.

我姐姐有个孩子。他很可爱。

Who is speaking? It's Bruce.

是谁？布鲁斯。（用于打电话时）

Who is it
?

是谁？（用于敲门时）

（2）it起指示作用（用于回答特殊疑问句）。

e.g.: What's that? It
's a pig.

那是什么？是一头猪。

Who is it? It
's Mr. Green.

是谁？格林先生。

（3）it用于前后指代。

e.g.: I lost a book. Where is it?

我丢了一本书。它在哪儿？（前指）

The cat has been dead. You can't forget
it

.

那只猫已经死了。你不能忘记它。（前指）

It
is a pity that they can't come here.

很遗憾他们不能到这儿来。（后指）

If you kill it
— the wolf, the people won't be hurt by it
. （前后指）

如果你杀了它——那只狼，人们就不会受伤了。

（4）it指时间、距离、天气或自然现象。

e.g.: It
is six o'clock.

现在六点。

It
is about four kilometers long.

大概有四公里长。

It
was cloudy yesterday.

昨天多云。

It
is going to rain.

要下雨了。

（5）it用于强调结构中，作形式主语。

e.g.: He carried the box to go upstairs.

他把箱子搬上了楼。

It
was him who carried the box to go upstairs.

是他把箱子搬上了楼。

It
was the box that he carried to go upstairs.

他把箱子搬上了楼。

It
was to go upstairs which he carried the box.

他把箱子搬上了楼。

英语中的强调句型结构为：

It + be + 强调部分 + 人（who）/ 物（that）+ 其他成分。

Tips：

当强调谓语时，需要用助动词形式，而不是强调结构。He did carry the box to go upstairs.

要特别注意这样一句话的强调：

He did not go to sleep until 3 o'clock last night
.

强调画线部分的结果是：

It was not until 3 o'clock last night that he went to sleep.

在这里发生了形式上的否定前置，甚至要是把It was省略的话还会有倒装的情况出现，因为有否定副词在句首。

Not until 3 o'clock last night did he go to sleep.

（6）it作形式主语或形式宾语。

e.g.: It
is necessary to know this point.

知道这一点很有必要。

Tips：

it在这里作形式主语代替不定式to know this point。（详见于“不定式”一节。）

e.g.: I found that it
is necessary to know this point.

我发现知道这一点很有必要。

Tips：

it在这里作形式宾语代替不定式to know this point。（详见于“不定式”一节。）

试比较：I found it
necessary to know this point.

我发现知道这一点很有必要。

Tips：

在本句中，it作形式宾语代替不定式to know this point，而后的necessary则作宾语补足语，而不是由it引导的宾语从句。

小结：
在本节中，it的用法难点在于：it用于强调结构中和it作形式主语或形式宾语。其他所介绍的知识可以作为一般了解。

请回答下列问题：

（1）it在什么情况下可以代替有生命的东西？

（2）it的什么结构是强调结构？

（3）it作形式主语的用法？

这几个问题都能够对答如流的话，那么it的用法就已经完全掌握了啊！

语序练习

1. Not only _____ a promise, but also he kept it.

A. he'd made

B. had he made

C. did he make

D. he made

2. — I don't think I can finish it tonight.

— _____. Let's stop and do it tomorrow.

A. So can I

B. I agree

C. Neither do I

D. Nor can I

3. _____ the teacher.

A. There goes

B. There comes

C. Then follow

D. Here goes

4. He likes swimming. _____.

A. So I do

B. Nor do I

C. Nor I do

D. So do I

5. No sooner _____ than I heard the ringing of the telephone.

A. I had gone out

B. had I gone out

C. did I go out

D. I did go out

6. _____ I you, I would tell her the truth.

A. I were

B. I can

C. Were

D. Am I

7. Not until the late years of 20th century _____ WTO.

A. China joined

B. did China joined

C. China has joined

D. has China joined

8. Seldom _____ her homework in the morning.

A. my sister does

B. does my sister

C. does my sister do

D. my sister do

9. Farmers had to work hard in fields, _____ in the factory.

A. works did so

B. so do workers

C. workers work so

D. so had workers

10. — John has been to the Great Wall.

— _____.

A. So he did

B. So did he

C. So he has

D. So has he

11. Only recently _____ to deal with the environmental problem.

A. something has done

B. has something done

C. has something been done

D. something has been done

12. Hardly _____ one problem settled _____ another appears.

A. have I got; than

B. have I got; when

C. do I got; than

D. had I gone; when

13. Busy _____ I am, I'll spend Sunday playing with my child.

A. no matter how

B. because

C. as

D. not matter how

14. — Where is Peter?

— Oh, _____.

A. he here comes

B. here does he come

C. here he comes

D. here comes he

15. — I like to play football, but I don't play it every day. — _____.

A. I do so

B. So I do

C. So do I

D. So it is with me

16. _____, I would have called you.

A. Did I know your telephone number

B. If I knew your telephone number

C. Had I known your telephone number

D. If I know your telephone number.

17. — It was warm yesterday. — _____.

A. So it did

B. So it was

C. So is it

D. So was it

18. He is a university student, _____.

A. so I am

B. so am I

C. neither am I

D. neither I am

19. I don't like philosophy, _____.

A. either does John

B. neither does John

C. so doesn't John

D. so does John

20. Never _____ such a terrible story.

A. I have heard

B. have I heard

C. did I hear

D. I heard

21. Only when you realize that how valuable water is _____ it.

A. you can save

B. can you save

C. that you can save

D. that can you save

22. She often goes shopping on Sunday, however, she _____ today.

A. does it

B. does go

C. does it

D. shopping

23. So _____ that he can't run fast.

A. fat is he

B. fat he is

C. fat does he

D. fat he fast

24. He can't solve this problem, _____.

A. nor I can

B. nor can I

C. I either can

D. either can I

25. _____, it can't stop our advance.

A. Wide as the river is

B. Wide the river is

C. Wide as the river

D. As wide the river is

26. I don't enjoy this film. _____.

A. My friend either

B. Neither my friend does

C. My friend doesn't either

D. Either does my friend

27. Not until _____ it was totally dark.

A. I came back home

B. came back I home

C. come I back home

D. did I come back home

28. So little _____ about economy that I can't understand the main idea of this passage.

A. neither I know

B. do I know

C. I know

D. neither do I know

29. The service is so terrible in that restaurant. Never again _____ there.

A. I'll go

B. will I go

C. do I go

D. I do go

30. So thick _____ that you couldn't stand on.

A. is the ice

B. the ice is

C. the ice was

D. was the ice

31. Seldom _____ such a big diamond.

A. will be see

B. was I looking

C. had I seen

D. can I see

32. _____, nor does Mary.

A. Mike planted trees today

B. Mike didn't plant trees today

C. Mike plant trees today

D. Mike doesn't plant trees today

33. By no means _____ look down upon the disabled.

A. we should

B. ought we to

C. we shall

D. should we

34. No sooner _____ the airport _____ the plane flew.

A. I had reached; than

B. I had reached; when

C. had I reached; than

D. had I reached; when

35. The closer to the top of maintain, _____.

A. air is thicker

B. the thicker is air

C. the thicker air is

D. thicker is air

36. _____ a good teacher, I would study hard in the university.

A. Should I to become

B. Were I to become

C. I should become

D. Had I become

37. _____, her clothes is very plain.

A. A popular star she is

B. Popular star as she is

C. A population star as is she

D. Popular star as is she

38. In the old house _____ 10 years ago.

A. an old lady live

B. had old lady lived

C. lived an old lady

D. have old lady lived

39. Only the world work together _____ peacefully.

A. people were able to live

B. were able to people live

C. were people able to live

D. live people were able

主谓一致练习

1. All you have to do _____ to protect environment.

A. have to

B. are

C. is

D. to

2. Reading novels and articles _____ what I enjoy most.

A. is

B. has

C. have

D. are

3. Neither of us _____ to climb the mountains.

A. dares

B. dare

C. daring

D. dare not

4. The writer and the poet _____ attending the party.

A. will

B. is

C. are

D. would

5. The writer and poet _____ attending the party.

A. will

B. is

C. are

D. would

6. To see _____ to believe.

A. is

B. are

C. has

D. mean

7. The family _____ having the delicious dinner now.

A. are

B. is

C. were

D. was

8. The police _____ patrolling on the streets at this time of yesterday.

A. were

B. is

C. was

D. are

9. Each teacher and student _____ present.

A. is

B. are

C. were

D. have to be

10. Many a soldier _____ in Gulf war.

A. had died

B. were died

C. is died

D. has been dead

11. The whole class _____ to the Great Wall.

A. has been

B. have been

C. has gone

D. have gone

12. A number of people _____ in 9.11 attack.

A. has died

B. is died

C. were died

D. have been killed

13. The number of articles published on pollution _____ amazing.

A. are

B. is

C. have been

D. be

14. Both bread and milk _____.

A. is on sale

B. are on sale

C. is sale

D. are sale

15. Bread and milk _____ my favorite food for breakfast.

A. is

B. will be

C. are

D. should be

16. A series of lectures on philosophy _____ by Professor Wang yesterday.

A. is given

B. are given

C. were given

D. was given

17. Not only you but also I _____ in trouble.

A. am

B. were

C. is

D. are

18. Neither Jane nor her classmate _____ go abroad for studying.

A. are going to

B. is going to

C. have gone to

D. have been to

19. Either the principal or the teachers _____ the meeting.

A. attends

B. is attending

C. has attended

D. attend

20. Ten minutes _____ too short for me to prepare the presentation.

A. is

B. are

C. being

D. were

21. Parents as well as Peter _____ football very much.

A. likes to play

B. like

C. likes

D. likes playing

22. Three sevenths of ice _____.

A. have melted

B. melt

C. are melting

D. has been melted

23. Jerry is one of the students who _____ England.

A. have been to

B. has been to

C. have gone to

D. has gone for

24. George is the only one of the students who _____ England.

A. have been to

B. has been to

C. have gone to

D. has gone for

25. Ten percent of the apples _____.

A. goes bad

B. go bad

C. turn bad

D. turn bad

26. Two thirds of the forest _____.

A. have been destroyed

B. has been destroyed

C. have destroyed

D. has destroyed

27. The Smiths have gone to Beijing, _____?

A. haven't they

B. do they

C. don't they

D. hasn't they

28. Every man and every woman _____ the right of voting.

A. has

B. is

C. will have

D. would have

29. Politics _____ more difficult than history.

A. are

B. is

C. have been

D. was

30. All _____ and all _____.

A. have left; are quiet

B. has left; is quiet

C. have left; is quiet

D. has left; are quiet

31. To know something about the Iraq War _____ easy.

A. is

B. are

C. were

D. have been

32. The poor _____.

A. have no house to live

B. has no house to live

C. have no house to live in

D. has no house to live in

33. More than one child _____ in the big fire last year.

A. was

B. were

C. is

D. are

34. One or two months _____ enough for you to prepare the examination.

A. are

B. is

C. have

D. has

35. If anyone calls me, please take _____ name and address.

A. her

B. their

C. his

D. theirs

36. I don't think he is honest, _____?

A. do I

B. don't I

C. isn't he

D. is he

37. The teacher, with her students , _____ discussing the environmental problem.

A. is

B. are

C. were

D. who is

38. Not all children will get _____ presents on Christmas day.

A. his

B. her

C. their

D. theirs

39. Where to go and how to go _____ yet.

A. have not been decided

B. has not been decided

C. have not decided

D. has not decided

40. What you said just now _____ me.

A. has nothing to do with

B. have nothing to do with

C. had nothing to do with

D. has been nothing to do with

41. More than one people _____ in the accident yesterday.

A. were killed

B. killed

C. has killed

D. was killed

42. More friends than one _____ to his party.

A. has been invited

B. have been invited

C. has invited

D. have invited

it的用法练习

1. She thought _____ necessary that she should practice her spoken English.

A. that

B. him

C. it

D. this

2. — What's the day today?

— _____ Monday.

A. Its

B. It's

C. It was

D. It were

3. _____ Peter who broke the windows.

A. It is

B. It

C. It was

D. It were

4. _____ for you to tell lies.

A. It is right

B. It is wrong

C. It right

D. It was wrong

5. _____ was reported that U.S. wanted to disarm Iraq.

A. It

B. He

C. She

D. they

6. Food and service in this restaurant are better than _____ used to be.

A. they

B. it

C. we

D. then

7. The color of my pen is different from _____ of yours.

A. this

B. it

C. one

D. that

8. _____ between 1830 and 1835 that the modern newspaper was born.

A. It is

B. It was

C. There was

D. what was

9. _____ cost me three Pounds to buy fruit.

A. It

B. that

C. Which

D. What

10. — What is time now?

— _____ 7 o'clock.

A. It

B. It is

C. It was

D. That was

11. The baby was about to cry when _____ heard noise.

A. he

B. she

C. it

D. they

12. — Do you see the bird singing in the trees?

— Yes, I see _____.

A. one

B. it

C. that

D. this

13. We often take _____ for granted that the tiger should be killed.

A. that

B. it

C. what

D. which

14. Mary speaks in a low voice; _____ is difficult to know what she is saying.

A. that

B. it

C. so

D. she

15. Hasn't _____ been discussed if we will visit Pairs?

A. that

B. which

C. what

D. it

16. _____ seems that she is not a university student.

A. That

B. she

C. That's

D. It

17. — Can you tell me where my book is?

— _____ is over there.

A. It

B. That

C. This

D. Its

18. _____ the year of 1949 _____ People's Republic of China was founded.

A. It was until; that

B. It was until; when

C. It was not until; that

D. It was not until; when

19. _____ I will come back home.

A. That is before long that

B. When is before long that

C. It is before long that

D. This is before long that

20. — How long was the Long March?

— _____ was twenty-five thousand Li.

A. It

B. That

C. What

D. there

21. I felt _____ would be silly to tell him what had happened.

A. that

B. it

C. its

D. it is

22. _____ was useless to forbid people to smoke cigarettes.

A. That

B. What

C. Its

D. It

23. My watch is so old. I want to _____.

A. change one for it

B. change it for a new one

C. change it with a new one

D. change one for that

24. _____ surprised us very much that Mary should have left without a word.

A. What

B. It

C. Its

D. That

25. — _____ that she is looking for?

— She is looking for her English book.

A. What is it

B. What was it

C. What are they

D. What were they

参考答案

第一天　突破英语语法的基本知识和名词

练习

1. C

2. D

3. D

4. B

5. C

6. B

7. D

8. A

9. C

10. C

11. D

12. A

13. C

14. D

15. B

16. B

17. A

18. C

19. A

20. B

21. C

22. D

23. A

24. B

25. B

26. B

27. D

28. D

29. D

30. D

31. B

32. C

33. C

34. D

35. B

36. A

37. A

38. B

39. B

40. C

第二天　突破英语的代词和冠词

代词练习

1. D

2. B

3. A

4. D

5. D

6. D

7. A

8. C

9. A

10. B

11. A

12. D

13. B

14. D

15. A

16. D

17. C

18. C

19. B

20. D

21. A

22. C

23. C

24. D

25. D

26. D

27. A

28. D

29. A

30. C

31. D

32. D

33. D

34. C

35. A

36. B

37. A

38. C

39. D

40. C

41. D

42. D

43. A

44. B

45. D

46. D

47. C

48. C

49. C

50. C

51. B

52. B

53. C

54. B

55. C

56. B

57. A

冠词练习

1. A

2. A

3. A

4. A

5. B

6. D

7. C

8. A

9. B

10. B

11. C

12. B

13. D

14. B

15. A

16. C

17. B

18. D

19. B

20. D

21. D

22. A

23. D

24. C

25. A

26. D

27. D

28. B

29. A

30. B

31. B

32. C

33. C

34. A

35. D

36. A

37. A

38. A

39. C

40. A

第三天　突破英语的数词、形容词和副词

数词练习

1. D

2. C

3. C

4. B

5. B

6. A

7. C

8. C

9. A

10. C

11. C

12. B

13. B

14. D

15. A

16. A

17. B

18. D

19. C

形容词和副词练习

1. D

2. B

3. C

4. C

5. A

6. D

7. C

8. B

9. A

10. A

11. D

12. C

13. A

14. B

15. C

16. B

17. B

18. A

19. B

20. C

21. D

22. D

23. A

24. A

25. C

26. A

27. B

28. A

29. C

30. A

31. C

32. A

33. B

34. B

35. C

36. D

37. D

38. B

39. D

40. C

41. C

42. D

43. B

44. D

45. A

46. B

47. C

48. A

49. D

50. C

51. C

52. A

53. C

54. B

55. C

56. A

57. C

58. D

59. B

60. A

61. B

62. A

63. B

64. C

65. D

66. D

67. A

68. B

69. D

70. D

71. A

72. C

73. C

74. D

75. B

76. D

77. D

78. D

79. D

80. D

第四天　突破英语的动词及其两种时态

练习

1. D

2. C

3. C

4. D

5. C

6. D

7. B

8. C

9. D

10. D

11. D

12. A

13. B

14. A

15. C

16. D

17. D

18. A

19. B

20. B

21. C

22. D

23. D

24. B

25. D

26. C

27. C

28. B

29. C

30. A

31. C

32. A

33. C

34. A

35. D

36. C

37. D

38. D

39. D

40. B

41. B

42. C

43. C

44. B

45. B

46. B

47. A

48. B

49. B

50. B

51. D

第六天　突破英语的时态（二）

练习

1. C

2. A

3. A

4. D

5. C

6. B

7. C

8. B

9. B

10. B

11. A

12. B

13. C

14. B

15. B

16. B

17. C

18. B

19. C

20. D

21. A

22. D

23. C

24. D

25. D

26. C

27. D

28. C

29. C

30. C

31. C

32. C

33. C

34. B

35. A

36. C

37. C

38. C

39. C

40. D

41. A

42. A

43. B

44. B

45. B

46. C

47. B

48. A

49. A

50. B

51. A

52. C

53. D

54. C

55. D

56. D

57. A

58. D

59. C

60. C

61. D

62. B

63. C

64. C

65. A

66. D

67. C

68. C

69. A

70. C

71. A

72. C

73. A

74. C

75. B

76. B

77. C

78. B

79. A

80. C

81. D

82. B

83. A

84. D

85. D

86. D

87. B

88. C

89. C

90. D

91. A

92. B

93. C

94. B

95. D

96. B

97. B

98. C

99. D

100. C

101. C

102. D

103. B

104. A

第七天　突破英语的被动语态和助动词以及情态动词

被动语态练习

1. B

2. B

3. A

4. B

5. D

6. A

7. B

8. D

9. A

10. C

11. B

12. B

13. D

14. B

15. D

16. A

17. C

18. C

19. B

20. C

21. B

22. C

23. C

24. C

25. C

26. A

27. B

28. C

29. B

30. A

31. D

32. A

33. D

34. A

35. B

36. C

37. D

38. C

39. B

40. B

助动词和情态动词练习

1. C

2. B

3. B

4. D

5. D

6. A

7. A

8. B

9. D

10. D

11. D

12. D

13. A

14. B

15. A

16. B

17. D

18. A

19. C

20. B

21. D

22. D

23. D

24. B

25. B

26. A

27. C

28. C

29. A

30. B

31. D

32. A

33. C

34. B

35. D

36. A

37. C

38. A

39. A

40. B

41. A

第八天　突破英语的非谓语动词

练习

1. A

2. C

3. A

4. C

5. B

6. A

7. A

8. B

9. B

10. A

11. C

12. D

13A

14. C

15. C

16. C

17. C

18. A

19. B

20. C

21. C

22. D

23. A

24. A

25. C

26. D

27. A

28. A

29. C

30. B

31. A

32. A

33. B

34. D

35. B

36. C

37. A

38. B

39. A

40. A

41. B

42. D

43. B

44. B

45. C

46. B

47. C

48. B

49. C

50. B

51. B

52. B

53A

54. D

55. B

56. C

57. D

58. A

59. A

60. A

61. D

62. C

63. A

64. C

65. C

66. B

67. A

68. A

69. D

70. D

71. B

72. B

73. C

74. A

75. B

76. B

77. B

78. B

79. B

80. B

81. B

82. C

83. B

84. D

85. C

86. A

87. D

88. D

89. C

90. B

91. B

92. D

93. B

94. A

95. B

96. D

97. B

98. A

99. A

100. C

101. D

第九天　突破英语的虚拟语气

练习

1. A

2. A

3. C

4. B

5. B

6. B

7. A

8. B

9. C

10. C

第十天　突破英语的介词、连词和基本句型

介词练习

1. C

2. C

3. B

4. A

5. B

6. D

7. D

8. A

9. D

10. D

11. A

12. C

13. A

14. D

15. D

16. C

17. C

18. B

19. A

20. A

21. A

22. B

23. B

24. D

25. A

26. B

27. C

28. D

29. C

30. B

31. D

32. B

33. C

34. C

35. B

36. D

37. A

38. A

39. B

40. A

41. B

42. D

43. A

44. B

45. B

46. C

47. A

48. A

49. D

50. D

连词练习

1. B

2. A

3. C

4. B

5. C

6. B

7. A

8. D

9. C

10. A

11. A

12. C

13. B

14. D

15. A

16. D

17. B

18. A

19. A

20. D

21. C

22. C

23. D

24. C

25. D

26. C

27. B

28. D

29. C

30. B

31. C

32. B

33. B

34. B

35. C

36. D

37. D

38. B

39. A

40. C

41. D

42. C

43. C

44. A

45. D

第十一天　突破英语的复合句

练习

1. B

2. C

3. A

4. D

5. D

6. A

7. C

8. D

9. A

10. B

11. C

12. A

13. D

14. B

15. C

16. B

17. C

18. A

19. A

20. D

21. B

22. C

23. C

24. B

25. C

26. A

27. B

28. C

29. A

30. B

31. D

32. A

33. D

34. D

35. B

36. B

37. C

38. A

39. A

40. B

41. C

42. B

43. B

44. A

45. C

46. A

47. A

48. B

49. A

50. B

51. A

52. D

53. C

54. B

55. C

56. D

57. C

58. D

59. B

60. D

61. B

62. B

63. A

64. D

65. C

66. C

67. B

68. C

69. B

70. B

71. D

72. A

73. A

74. D

75. B

76. B

77. B

78. D

79. C

80. D

81. C

82. C

83. A

84. B

85. A

86. A

87. A

88. B

89. C

90. B

91. D

92. D

93. B

94. D

95. A

96. C

97. B

98. C

99. D

100. D

101. A

102. B

103. B

104. C

105. D

106. C

107. A

108. C

109. C

110. B

111. C

112. B

113. B

114. C

115. A

116. D

117. C

118. B

119. D

120. D

121. C

122. C

123. C

124. A

125. B

126. A

127. B

128. B

129. B

130. B

131. B

132. A

133. C

134. D

135. B

136. B

137. C

138. B

139. B

140. C

141. D

142. B

143. A

第十二天　突破英语的语序、主谓一致和it的用法

语序练习

1. C

2. D

3. B

4. D

5. B

6. C

7. B

8. C

9. D

10. C

11. C

12. D

13. C

14. C

15. D

16. C

17. B

18. B

19. B

20. B

21. B

22. C

23. A

24. B

25. A

26. C

27. D

28. B

29. B

30. D

31. C

32. D

33. D

34. C

35. C

36. B

37. B

38. C

39. C

主谓一致练习

1. C

2. A

3. A

4. C

5. B

6. A

7. A

8. A

9. A

10. D

11. B

12. D

13. B

14. B

15. A

16. C

17. A

18. B

19. D

20. A

21. B

22. D

23. A

24. B

25. B

26. B

27. A

28. A

29. B

30. C

31. A

32. C

33. A

34. B

35. C

36. D

37. A

38. C

39. A

40. A

41. D

42. B

it的用法练习

1. C

2. B

3. C

4. D

5. A

6. A

7. D

8. B

9. A

10. B

11. C

12. B

13. B

14. B

15. D

16. D

17. A

18. C

19. C

20. A

21. B

22. D

23. B

24. B

25. A